Some symbolic expressions for number one

Share it with your friends Like

Thanks! Share it with your friends!

Close

Some symbolic expression for the number one (here are 24 terms)CONTENSअत्रिदृग्ज अत्रिनेत्रज अत्रिनेत्रप्रभव अत्रिनेत्रप्रसूत अत्रिनेत्रभू अत्रिनेत्रसूत अनंत अनन्त इंदुः इंद्रः क्षम क्षिति क्षोणिः क्ष्मा चंद्र चन्द्र निरेक भू भूः भूमिः मही रूप रूपम् वर्ण शत शशिन्

अत्रिदृग्ज — atridṛgja Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899atridṛgja «atri-dṛg-ja» m. «produced by Atri’s look», the moon, (in

arithm.) the number one.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

atridṛgja (atridṛś atri + dṛś + ja) m. «Mond (aus» Atri’s «Augen geboren»)

H. 105.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

atridṛgja pu° atrerdṛśonetrājjāyate jana—ḍa 5 ta° . candre

atrinetrajādayo’pyatra . tadvivṛtiratrijaśabde dṛśyam .

अत्रिनेत्रज — atrinetraja Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899atrinetraja «atri-netra-ja» m. «produced by Atri’s look», the moon, (in

arithm.) the number one.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

atrinetraja (atrinetraatri + netra + ja) m. = atridṛgja JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR.

अत्रिनेत्रप्रभव — atrinetraprabhava Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899atrinetraprabhava «atri-netra-prabhava» m. «produced by Atri’s look», the

moon, (in arithm.) the number one.

अत्रिनेत्रप्रसूत — atrinetraprasūta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899atrinetraprasūta «atri-netra-prasūta» m. «produced by Atri’s look», the

moon, (in arithm.) the number one.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

atrinetraprasūta (atrinetra + prasūta) m. = atridṛgja H. 105, Sch. HALĀY.

im ŚKDR.

atrinetraprasūta (so zu lesen).

अत्रिनेत्रभू — atrinetrabhū Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899atrinetrabhū «atri-netra-bhū» m. «produced by Atri’s look», the moon, (in

arithm.) the number one.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

atrinetrabhū (atrinetra + bhū adj.) m. = atridṛgja TRIK. 1, 1, 84.

अत्रिनेत्रसूत — atrinetrasūta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899atrinetrasūta «atri-netra-sūta» m. «produced by Atri’s look», the moon,

(in arithm.) the number one.

अनंत — anaṁta Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

anaṁta a. [nāsti aṁto yasya] Endless, infinite, eternal, boundless,

inexhaustible; -ratnaprabhavasya yasya Ku. 1. 3. —taḥ

(1) N. of Viṣṇu; gaṁdharvāpsarasaḥ siddhāḥ kinnaroragacāraṇāḥ .

nāṁtaṁ guṇānāṁ jānaṁti (nāsyāṁtamadhigacchaṁti)

tenānaṁto’yamucyate ..; also of Viṣṇu’s couch, the serpent Śeṣa; of

Kṛṣṇa and his brother; of Śiva, the 14th Arhat; Vāsuki, the lord of

serpents.

(2) A cloud.

(3) Talc.

(4) N. of a plant (siṁduvāra) Vitex Trifolia.

(5) The 23rd asterism śravaṇa.

(6) A silken cord with 14 knots tied round the right arm on the

anaṁtacaturdaśī day.

(7) The letter ā. —tā

(1) The earth (the endless).

(2) The number one.

(3) N. of various females; of Parvati.

(4) N. of various plants; śārivā, anaṁtamūla (a very medicinal plant)

dūrvā, āmalakī, guḍūcī, agnimaṁtha, kaṇā, lāṁgalī, durālabhā, harītakī,

agniśikhā, śyāmalatā, pippalī. —tī A small silken cord tied round the left

arm of a woman. —taṁ

(1) The sky, atmosphere.

(2) Infinity, eternity.

(3) Absolution, final beatitude; tadanaṁtāya kalpate Pt. 2. 72.

(4) The supreme spirit, Brahma (parabrahma,); satyaṁ

jñānamanaṁtaṁbrahmeti śrutiḥ . na vyāpitvāddeśatoṁ’to nityatvānnāpi

kālataḥ . na vastuto’pi sarvātmyādānaṁtyaṁ brahmaṇi tridhā ..

— Comp.

—ātman m. the Supreme spirit.

—kara a. magnifying to any extent; P. III. 2. 21.

—ga a. moving for ever.

—guṇa a. possessed of endless merits; of countless or infinite

number; plavaṁgānāmanaṁtaguṇataidhate Mv. 6. 55.

—caturdaśī, —vrataṁ [anaṁtasya ārādhanaṁ yasyāṁ sā

caturdaśī] the 14th day of the bright half of Bhadrapada when Ananta is

worshipped.

—jit (anaṁtāni bhūtāni jitavān) 1. N. of Vāsudeva, the conqueror of

all. 2. N. of an Arhat deity.

—tāna a. of endless width, extensive.

—tīrthakṛt m. 1. one who visits many places of pilgrimage. 2. a

Jaina deity.

—tṛtīyā the third day of the bright half of bhādrapada, mārgaśīrṣa

or vaiśākha; nabhasye vātha vaiśākhe mārgaśīrṣe’thavā punaḥ .

śuklapakṣatṛtīyāyāṁ … uktānaṁtatṛtīyaiṣā sutānaṁdaphalapradā. —dṛṣṭiḥ

[anaṁtā dṛṣṭayo netrāṇi yasya] N. of Śiva, or of Indra.

—devaḥ [anaṁtodeva iva] 1. the serpent Śeṣa. 2. [anaṁte dīvyati;

div-ac] N. of Nārayaṇa who sleeps on Śeṣa.

—pāra a. of endless width, boundless; -raṁ kila śabdaśāstraṁ Pt.

1.

—māyin a. of endless tricks, endlessly deceitful.

—mūlaḥ a medicinal plant; (śārivā). —rāśiḥ an infinite quantity.

—rūpa a. of innumerable forms or shapes; epithet of Viṣṇu.

—vātaḥ a disease of the head, resembling tetanus.

—vijayaḥ [anaṁtān vijayate dhvanidvārā anena] N. of Yudhiṣṭhira’s

conchshell Bg. 1. 16

—vīryaḥ N. of the 23rd Jaina Arhat of a future age.

—vrataṁ see anaṁtacaturdaśī above.

—śakti a. of boundless power, omnipotent, epithet of the Supreme

Being.

—śayanaṁ Travancore; Śriraṅgapaṭṭaṇa (?)

—śīrṣa N. of Viṣṇu or the Supreme Being. (

—rṣā) N. of the wife of Vasuki.

—śuṣma a. Ved. possessing endless strength; endlessly blowing.

—śrī a. of boundless magnificence, an epithet of the Supreme

Being.

अनन्त — ananta Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899ananta «an-anta» mf («ā») n. endless, boundless, eternal, infinite

ananta «an-anta» m. N. of Viṣṇu

ananta «an-anta» m. of śeṣa (the snake-god)

ananta «an-anta» m. of śeṣa’s brother Vāsuki

ananta «an-anta» m. of Kṛiṣṇa

ananta «an-anta» m. of his brother Baladeva

ananta «an-anta» m. of śiva

ananta «an-anta» m. of Rudra

ananta «an-anta» m. of one of the Viśva-devas

ananta «an-anta» m. of the 14th Arhat, &c.

ananta «an-anta» m. the plant Sinduvāra, Vitex Trifolia

ananta «an-anta» m. Talc

ananta «an-anta» m. the 23rd lunar asterism, śravaṇa

ananta «an-anta» m. a silken cord (tied round the right arm at a

particular festival)

ananta «an-anta» m. the letter «ā»

ananta «an-anta» m. a periodic decimal fraction?

ananta «an-anta» mf («ā») n. («ā») f. the earth

ananta «an-anta» m. the number one

ananta «an-anta» m. N. of Pārvatī and of various females, the plant

śārivā

ananta «an-anta» m. Periploca Indica or Asclepias Pseudosarsa or

Asthmatica (the root of which supplies a valuable medicine)

ananta «an-anta» n. the sky, atmosphere

ananta «an-anta» n. Talc.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

ananta (3. a + anta) = nānta VOP. 6, 9. 1) adj. f. ā «unendlich» (nach

Ausdehnung, Zahl, Dauer, innerer Kraft u. s. w.) AK. 3, 4, 84. TRIK. 3, 3,

144. H. an. 3, 240. MED. t. 81. von Wegen ṚV. 1, 113, 3. 5, 47, 2. Tiefen

7, 104, 17. Geschossen 1, 121, 9. u.s.w. anante antaraśmani 1, 130, 3.

anantaṁ śuṣmamudiyarti bhānunā 10, 75, 3. 6, 61, 8. AV. 10, 8, 12. BṚH.

ĀR. UP. 1, 5, 13. TAITT. UP. 2, 1. agnihotram ŚAT. BR. 2, 3, 1, 13. diśaḥ

BṚH. ĀR. UP. 4, 1, 5. ātmā ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 1, 9. yadyaddadāti vidhivat —

tattatpitṝṇāṁ bhavati paratrānantamakṣayam M. 3, 275. ajasramanantaṁ

sukham 4, 149. dānam 7, 85. PAÑCAT. II, 76. anantaratnasaṁpūrṇa R. 5,

12, 38. anantakīrti RAGH. 2, 64. PAÑCAT. Pr. 10. — 2) m. a) ein Beiname

Viṣṇu’s oder Kṛṣṇa’s TRIK. 1, 1, 28. 3, 3, 144. H. an. 3, 240. MED. t. 81.

VOP. 5, 21. nāsyāntamadhigacchanti tenānanta iti śrutiḥ HARIV. 12320. —

b) ein Beiname Baladeva’s, des ältern Bruders von Kṛṣṇa, H. 224. — c) ein

Beiname Rudra’s Ind. St. I, 385. Śiva’s, ŚIV. — d) Śeṣa, der König der

Nāga’s, AK. 1, 2, 1, 5. TRIK. 1, 2, 6. 3, 3, 144. H. 1307. an. 3, 240. MED.

t. 81. anantaścāsmi nāgānām BHAG. 10, 29. MBH. 1, 1587. R. 4, 40, 53.

VP. 205. — e) Vāsuki, ein anderer König der Schlangen, ŚABDĀRṆ. im

ŚKDR. — f) Name eines der Viśvedeva’s HARIV. 11542. — g) Name des

14ten Arhant’s der gegenwärtigen Avasarpiṇī H. 29. an. 3, 240; vgl.

anantajit und anantatīrthakṛt. — h) ein häufig vorkommender Mannsname

LIA. I, Anh. XXVII, N. 4. ZdmG.II, 341, No. 184. Verz. d. B. H. — i) Name

einer Pflanze, «Vitex Negundo» (sinduvāra), RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — k)

mystische Bezeichnung des Buchstabens ā Ind. St.II, 316. — 3) f. -ntā. a)

«Erde» AK. 2, 1, 2. H. 936. an. 3, 240. MED. t. 82. — b) Śiva’s Gemahlin

Pārvatī H. ś. 52. an. 3, 241. MED. t. 82. — c) N. einer buddhistischen

Göttin (tārā) TRIK. 1, 1, 18. — d) Janamejaya’s Frau LIA. I, Anh. XIX. —

e) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = śārivā AK. 2, 4, 3, 30. H. an. 3, 241.

MED. t. 81. «Hemidesmus indicus R. Br. (Periploca indica Willd., Asclepias

Pseudosarsa Roxb».) ein Schlingstrauch, dessen Wurzeln medicinisch viel

gebraucht werden. Er führt in Bengalen noch jetzt diesen Namen.

AINSLIE, Mat. ind. I, 381. SUŚR. 1, 59, 11. 132, 2. 2, 78, 18. 416, 19. u. s.

w.; s. utpalaśārivā. Nach WILS.: «Echites frutescens.» — b) eine Staude,

«Alhagi Maurorum Tournef.» AK. 2, 4, 3, 10. H. an. 3, 240. MED. t. 82.

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. Sie heisst so, weil sie auch in der heissen Jahreszeit

nicht abstirbt, sondern Blätter und Blüthen treibt, während alle kleineren

Pflanzen verdorren. S. yavāsa. — g) ein Gras, «Agrostis linearis L.» AK. 2,

4, 5, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 144. H. 1192. an. 3, 241. MED. t. 81. RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. S. dūrvā. — d) ein Baum, «Terminalia citrina Roxb.» (pathyā), MED.

t. 82. S. harītakī. — e) ein Baum, «Emblica officinalis Gaert.», MED. t. 82.

S. āmalakī. — z) ein Schlingstrauch, «Cocculus cordifolius DC.» TRIK. 3, 3,

144. H. an. 3, 240. MED. t. 82. S. guḍūcī. — h) = agnimantha «Premna

spinosa (longifolia?») RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — J) = kaṇā «Piper longum» MED.

t. 82. — i) = lāṅgalī H. an. 3, 241. — c) = viśalyā eine noch nicht näher

bestimmte Gemüsepflanze AK. 2, 4, 5, 2. H. an. 3, 241. MED. t. 82. — 4)

n. a) «Luft, Atmosphäre, Himmelsraum» AK. 1, 1, 2, 1. TRIK. 3, 3, 144. H.

163. an. 3, 240. MED. t. 82. — b) «Talk» (abhraka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

ananta 3) f) «ein best. Fisch», = kajjalī ŚBDAR. im ŚKDR. u. dem letzten

Worte.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

ananta 1 I (ĀDIŚEṢA).

ananta 2 II A synonym of the Sun God. (M.B., Vana Parva, Chapter 3,

Verse 24).

ananta 3 III A synonym of Śrī Kṛṣṇa. (M.B., Udyoga Parva, Chapter 70,

Verse 14).

ananta 4 IV One of the military captains of Skanda. (M.B., Śalya Parva,

Chapter 45, Verse 57).

ananta 5 V A synonym of Viṣṇu. (M.B., Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 149,

Verse 83).

ananta 6 VI A synonym of Śiva. (M.B., Anuśāsana Parva, Chapter 17,

Verse 135).

ananta The abode of Ananta in the nether regions. (Devī Bhāgavata,

Canto 8). (There are certain indications that Ananta refers to Trivandrum,

Capital city of the Kerala State. Explanations of words like Svarga, Bhūmi,

Pātāla, Ananta, Deva, Asura, throw much light on this inference).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

ananta a. endless; m. Viṣṇu, a man’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

ananta an-anta, a. endless; m. N. of Viṣṇu, Śeṣa, and of various men;

-ka, a. endless, infinite;

-kirti, m. N.;

-guṇa, a. infinitely greater;

-tā, f. abst. N.;

-tā, f., -tva, n. endlessness, infiniteness;

-pada, n. Viṣṇu’s path, sky;

-pāra, a. that one never gets to the end of.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

ananta pu° nāsti antaḥ guṇānāṁ yasya ba° . gandharvāpsarasaḥ siddhāḥ

kinnaroragacāraṇāḥ . nāntaṁ guṇānāṁ jānanti tenānanto’yamucyate

ityuktalakṣaṇe viṣṇau, ananta! saṁsāramahāsamudre magnān

samabhyuddhara vāsudeva! iti bhaviṣyapurā° . viṣṇurvīro’nanta iti

viṣṇusa° . meghe . bahuśīrṣa katvādaparicchinne śeṣanāge, tadavatāre

balabhadre ca . antaḥ paricchedaḥ deśataḥ kālataḥ vastutaśca nāsti

yasya . tasmin parabrahmaṇi na° satyaṁ jñānamanantaṁ brahmeti śrutiḥ

. na vyāpitvāddeśato’nto nityatvānnāpi kālataḥ . na vastuto’pi

sarvātmyādānantyaṁ brahmaṇi tridhā . deśakālānyavastūnāṁ

kalpitatvācca māyayā . na deśādikṛto’ntī’sti brahmānantaṁ tataḥ

sphuṭamiti pañcadaśī . ākāśe ca . bahuvistāravati sinduvāravṛkṣe pu° .

avadhiśūnye, iyattāśūnye vastumātre, sakale ca tri°

anantaratnaprabhavasya yasyeti kumā° . jinabhede pu° .

इंदुः — iṁduḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

iṁduḥ [unatti kledayati caṁdrikayā bhuvanaṁ uṁd-u ādericca Uṇ. 1. 12]

(1) The moon; dilīpa iti rājeṁduriṁduḥ kṣīranidhāviva R. 1. 12 (iṁdu

is said to mean in the Veda a drop of Soma juice, a bright drop or spark;

sutāsa iṁdavaḥ Rv. 1. 16. 6).

(2) The mṛgaśiras Nakshatra.

(3) (In Math.) The number ‘one’.

(4) Camphor. —(pl.)

(1) The periodical changes of the moon.

(2) The time of moonlight, night.

— Comp.

—kamalaṁ the white lotus.

—kalā 1. a digit of the moon. (These are 16, each of which is

mythologically said to be devoured by 16 deities in succession). —2. N. of

several plants; amṛtā, guḍūcī, somalatā. —kalikā 1. N. of a plant (ketakī).

—2. a digit of the moon.

—kāṁtaḥ the moon-stone. (

—tā) 1. night. —2. N. of a plant (ketakī). —kṣayaḥ 1. waning or

disappearance of the moon. —2. the new moon day.

—jaḥ, —putraḥ the planet Mercury. (

—jā) N. of the river Revā or Narmadā.

—janakaḥ 1. the ocean (the moon being produced amongst other

jewels at the churning of the ocean). —2. the sage atri. —dalaḥ a digit,

crescent.

—puṣpikā N. of a plant (kalikarī or jāṁgalī). —bhaṁ 1. the sign

called Cancer. —2. the Nakshatra called mṛgāśiras. —bhā a kind of water-

lily.

—bhṛt, —śekharaḥ, —mauliḥ ‘the moon crested god,’ epithets of

Śiva.

—maṇiḥ 1. the moon-stone. —2. a pearl.

—maṁḍalaṁ the orb or disc of the moon.

—ratnaṁ a pearl.

—le(re)khā 1. a digit of the moon. —2. N. of several plants, see

iṁdukalā. —lokaḥ the world of the moon.

—lohakaṁ, —lauhaṁ silver.

—vadanā N. of a metre; see Appendix.

—vāraḥ a kind of yoga.

—vāsaraḥ Monday.

—vrataṁ a religious observance depending on the age of the moon.

It consists in diminishing the quantity of food by a certain portion daily,

for a fortnight or a month; cf. cāṁdrāyaṇa.

इंद्रः — iṁdraḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

iṁdraḥ [iṁd-ran; iṁdatīti iṁdraḥ; idi aiśvarye Malli.]

(1) The lord of gods.

(2) The god of rain, rain; cloud.

(3) A lord or ruler (as of men &c.); first or best (of any class of

objects), always as the last member of comp.; nareṁdraḥ a lord of men i.

e. a king; so mṛgeṁdraḥ a lion; gajeṁdraḥ the lord or chief of elephants;

so yogīṁdraḥ, kapīṁdraḥ.

(4) A prince, king.

(5) The pupil of the right eye.

(6) N. of the plant kuṭaja.

(7) Night.

(8) One of the divisions of bhāratavarṣa.

(9) N. of the 26th Yoga. (10) The human or animal soul.

(11) A vegetable poison.

(12) The Yoga star in the 26th Nakshatra.

(13) Greatness. —drā The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī. [Indra, the god of the

firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is

placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an

uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the

Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is

sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a

destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭaka, and in Rv. 10. 90. 13 he is

said to have sprung from the mouth of Purusha. He is of a ruddy or golden

colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden

chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the

thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the

demous of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi,

Vṛtra, Śambara, Namuchi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles,

and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his

worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain,

and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the

Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses

arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite

food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achievements

(cf. Rv. 10. 119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to

invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother;

a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the

deliverer and comforter of his servants. He is a wall of defence; his friend

is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly

those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts

of temporal blessings, as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence,

prosperous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra’s wife is

Indrani, who is invoked among the goddesses.

Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in

the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and

Dākṣāyaṇi or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahma, Viṣṇu and Maheśa

(though in some places Viṣṇu is regarded as his younger brother, cf. R.

14. 59, 15. 40), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is commonly

styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is

the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is

called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends

down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly

dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology

is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of

which is his seduction of Ahalya, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and

for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage

impressed upon him a 1000 marks resembling the female organ, and he

was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed

into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the

Rāmāyaṇa Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off

to Laṅkā by Rāvaṇa’s son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received

the title of ‘Indrajit.’ It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the

gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a

punishment for his seduction of Ahalya. He is also represented as being in

constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending

down nymphs to beguile their minds (see. Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is

said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut

off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories

are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, grandson of

Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that

he and Kṛṣṇa were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the

latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in

spite of Indra’s resistance. His wife is Indrani, the daughter of the demon

Puloman, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of

Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his

achievements, e. g. vṛtrahan, balabhid, pākaśāsana, gotrabhid,

puraṁdara, śatakratu, jiṣṇu, namucisūdana &c. (see Ak. I. 1. 44-47). The

Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvati; his garden, Nandana;

his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow,

and his sword, Paranja].

— Comp.

—agniḥ the fire produced from the contact of clouds; -dhūmaḥ

frost, snow; -devatā the 16th lunarmansion.

—anujaḥ, —avarajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Narayaṇa.

—ariḥ an Asura or demon.

—avasānaḥ a desert.

—aśanaḥ 1. hemp (dried and chewed). —2. the shrub which bears

the seed used in jeweller’s weight, (guṁjāvṛkṣa) —āyudhaṁ Indra’s

weapon, the rainbow; iṁdrāyudhadyotitatoraṇāṁkaṁ R. 7. 4, 12. 79; K.

127. (

—dhaḥ) 1. N. of horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapinjala changed into a

horse). —2. a horse marked with black about the eyes. (

—dhā) a kind of leech.

—āsanaṁ 1. the throne of Indra. —2. a throne in general. —3. a

foot of five short syllables.

—ijyaḥ N. of bṛhaspati the preceptor of gods.

—īśvaraḥ one of the forms of Śiva-linga.

—utsavaḥ a festival honouring Indra.

—ṛṣabha a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an

epithet of the earth.

—karman m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra’s deeds).

—kīlaḥ 1. N. of the mountain maṁdara. —2. a rock. (

—laṁ) the banner of Indra.

—kuṁjaraḥ Indra’s elephant, Airāvata.

—kūṭaḥ N. of a mountain.

—kṛṣṭa a. ‘ploughed by Indra,’ growing exuberantly or in a wild

state. (

—ṣṭaḥ) a kind of corn produced by rain-water.

—ketuḥ Indra’s banner.

—kośaḥ —ṣaḥ, —ṣakaḥ 1. a couch, sofa. —2. a plat-form. —3. a

projection of the roof of a house. —4. a pin or bracket projecting from the

wall (nāgadaṁta). —giriḥ the maheṁdra mountain.

—guruḥ, ācāryaḥ the teacher of Indra; i. e. bṛhaspati. —gopaḥ, —

gopakaḥ [iṁdro gopo rakṣako’sya, varṣābhavatvāttasya] a kind of insect

of red or white colour; K. 100.

—caṁdanaṁ the white sandal wood.

—cāpaṁ, —dhanus n. 1. a rainbow; vidyutvaṁtaṁlalitavanitāḥ

seṁdracāpaṁ sacitrāḥ Me. 64; Śi. 7. 4. —2. the bow of Indra.

—chaṁdas n. [iṁdra iva sahasranetreṇa sahasragucchena

chādyate] a necklace consisting of 1000 strings.

—jananaṁ Indra’s birth.

—jananīya a. treating of Indra’s birth (as a work).

—jā a. Ved. born or arising from Indra.

—jālaṁ [iṁdrasya parameśvarasya jālaṁ māyeva] 1. the net of

Indra. —2. a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war. —3.

deception, cheating. —4. conjur ing, jugglery, magical tricks;

svapneṁdrajālasadṛśaḥ khalu jīvalokaḥ Śānti. 2. 2; K. 105.

—jālika a. [iṁdrajāla-ṭhan] deceptive, unreal, delusive. (

—kaḥ) a juggler, conjurer.

—jit m. ‘conqueror of Indra’, N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed

by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda, a son Rāvaṇa.

When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son

Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat,

Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which

he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to

Lanka. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release,

and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, ‘conqueror of Indra’; but the

victor refused to release his prisoner unless he were promised

immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he

strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is

represented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was

engaged in a sacrifice]. -haṁtṛ or vijayin m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa.

—jyeṣṭha a. Ved. led by Indra.

—tāpanaḥ the thundering of clouds.

—tūlaṁ, tūlakaṁ a flock of cotton.

—damanaḥ the son of Bāṇāsura.

—dāruḥ the tree Pinus Devadāru.

—druḥ, drumaḥ 1 the plant Terminalia Arjuna (arjuna). —2. the

plant kuṭaja. —dvīpaḥ —paṁ one of the 9 Dvīpas or divisions of the

continent (of India).

—dhvajaḥ a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra.

—nakṣatraṁ Indra’s lunar mansion phalgunī. —netraṁ 1. the eye of

Indra. —2. the number one thousand.

—nīlaḥ [iṁdra iva nīlaḥ śyāmaḥ] a sapphire; R. 13. 54; 16. 69; Me.

46, 77.

—nīlakaḥ an emerald.

—patnī Indra’s wife, śacī. —parṇī, —puṣpā N. of a medicinal plant.

—parvataḥ 1. the maheṁdra mountain. —2. a blue mountain.

—putrā N. of aditi. —purogama, —puraḥsara, —śreṣṭa a. led or

preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head.

—purohitaḥ N. of bṛhaspati. (—tā) the asterism Pushya.

—prasthaṁ N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the

Pāṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi);

iṁdraprasthagamastāvatkāri mā saṁtu cedayaḥ Śi. 2. 63.

—praharaṇaṁ Indra’s weapon, the thunderbolt.

—bheṣajaṁ dried ginger.

—makhaḥ a sacrifice in honour of Indra.

—mahaḥ 1. a festival in honour of Indra. —2. the rainy season; —

kāmukaḥ a dog.

—mādana a. animating or delighting Indra.

—medin a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra.

—yavaḥ, —vaṁ seed of the Kutaja tree.

—luptaḥ, —ptaṁ, —luptakaṁ 1. excessive baldness of the head. —2.

loss of beard.

—lokaḥ Indra’s world, Svarga or Paradise.

—lokeśaḥ 1. lord of the Indra’s world, i. e. Indra. —2. a guest (who,

if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host).

—vaṁśā, —vajrā N. of two metres, see Appendix.

—vallarī, —vallī N. of a plant (pārijāta) or of iṁdravāruṇī. —vastiḥ

[iṁdrasya ātmanaḥ vastiriva] the calf (of the leg).

—vātatama a. Ved. desired by Indra.

—vāyū (du) Indra and Vayu.

—vāruṇī, —vāruṇikā Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd (Mar. moṭhī

kaṁvaḍaLa). —vāh a. carrying Indra.

—vṛkṣaḥ the Devadaru tree.

—vṛddhā a kind of abscess.

—vaiḍūryaṁ a kind of precious stone.

—vrataṁ Indra’s rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who

is said to follow iṁdravrata when he distributes benefits as Indra pours

down rain); vārṣikāṁścaturo māsān yarthedropyabhivarṣati .

tathābhivarṣetsvaṁ rāṣṭraṁ kāmairiṁdravrataṁ caran … —śaktiḥ f.

Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified.

—śatruḥ 1. an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on

the last syllable), an epithet of prahlāda; R. 7. 35. —2. [iṁdraḥ śatruḥ

yasya] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of vṛtra (when the accent is

on the first syllable). (This refers to a. legend in the Śat. Br., where it is

said that Vṛtra’s father intended his son to become the destroyer of

Indra, and asked him to say iṁdraśatrurvadhasva &c., but who, through

mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra;

cf. Śik. 52:

—maṁtro hīnaḥ svarato varṇato vā mithyāprayukto na

tamarthamāha . sa vāgvajro yajamānaṁ hināsti yatheṁdraśatruḥ

svaratoparādhāt … —śalabhaḥ a kind of insect.

—saṁdhā connection or alliance with Indra.

—sārathiḥ. 1. N of Mātalī. —2. an epithet of Vāyu, driving in the

same carriage with Indra.

—sutaḥ, —sūnuḥ 1. N. of

(a) Jayanta;

(b) Arjuna;

(c) Vāli, the king of monkeys. —2. N. of the arjuna tree. —surasaḥ,

—surā a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications

(nirguṁḍī). —senā Indra’s missile or host. —senānīḥ the leader of Indra’s

armies, epithet of Kārtikeya. —stut m., —stomaḥ 1. praise of Indra, N. of a

particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies. —2. a sacrifice

in honour of Indra. —havaḥ invocation of Indra. —hastaḥ a kind of

medicament.

क्षम — kṣama Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṣama mf («ā») n. (g. «pacādi») patient (said of the earth, perhaps with

reference to 2. «kṣam»)

kṣama ifc. ( 3-2, 1 8) enduring, suffering, bearing, submissive, resisting

mf («ā») n. adequate, competent, able, fit for (loc. or inf. or in comp.,

e.g. «vayaṁ tyaktuṁ kṣamāḥ», «we are able to quit», śāntiś.) &c.

mf («ā») n. favourable to (gen.)

mf («ā») n. bearable, tolerable (=

mf («ā») n. fit, appropriate, becoming, suitable, proper for (gen. dat.,

loc. inf. or in comp.) (e.g. «kṣamaṁ kauravāṇām», «proper for the

Kauravas», iii, 252) (e.g. «na sa kṣamaḥ kopayitum», «e is not a fit

object, for anger», iv, 32, 20) &c.

kṣama m. «the patient», N. of śiva

kṣama m. a kind of sparrow

kṣama mf («ā») n. («ā») f. patience, forbearance, indulgence (one of the

«sāmānya-dharmās» i.e. an obligation to all castes &c.

kṣama m. «kṣamāṁ» «kṛ», to be indulgent to, have patience or bear with

(«prati» ; or gen., śāntiś.)

kṣama m. «Patience» (personified as a daughter of Daksha and wife of

Pulaha 14035

kṣama m. tameness (as of an antelope)

kṣama m. resistance

kṣama m. (= 2. «kṣam») the earth &c.

kṣama m. (hence) the number «one»

kṣama m. N. of Durgā

kṣama m. the Khadira tree (Acacia Catechu)

kṣama m. N. of a species of the Atijagati metre

kṣama m. N. of a female shepherd

kṣama m. of a śākta authoress of Mantras

kṣama m. of a river (= «vetravatī»)

kṣama m. for «kṣapā» (night) ; («am») n. propriety fitness ([cf. Hib.

‘cam’, «strong, mighty; power»; ‘cama’, «brave.»])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṣama a. [kṣam-ac]

(1) Patient.

(2) Enduring, submissive.

(3) Adequate, competent, able (with gen., loc., inf. or in comp.);

malino hi yathādarśo rūpālokasya na kṣamaḥ Y. 3. 141; sā hi

rakṣaṇavidhau tayoḥ kṣamā R. 11. 6; hṛdayaṁ na tvavalaṁbituṁ kṣamāḥ

R. 8. 60; gamanakṣama, nimūrlanakṣama &c.

(4) Appropriate, fit, proper, suitable; tanno yaduktamaśivaṁ na hi

tatkṣamaṁ te U. 1. 14; ātmakarmakṣamaṁ dehaṁ kṣātro dharma

ivāśritaḥ R. 1. 13; S. 5. 27.

(5) Fit for, capable of, suited to; upabhogakṣame deśe V. 2;

tapaḥkṣamaṁ sādhayituṁ ya icchati S. 1. 18; sparśakṣamaṁ ratnaṁ 1.

28; 7. 5.

(6) Bearable, endurable.

(7) Favourable, friendly. —maṁ

(1) Propriety, fitness.

(2) Battle, war. —maḥ N. of Śiva.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṣama (von 1. kṣam) v. l. im gaṇa pacādi zu P. 3, 1, 134. 1) adj. f. ā; ein

auf kṣama ausgehendes comp. bewahrt den Ton des ersten Wortes nach

P. 3, 2, 1, Vārtt. 7. a) «geduldig» H. an. 2, 317. vimṛgvarīṁ pṛthivīmā

vadāmi kṣamāṁ bhūmim AV. 12, 1, 29. — b) «ertragend, aushaltend,

Widerstand leistend»: kleśakṣama DRAUP. 6, 14. bahukṣamā KUMĀRAS.

5, 40. vapuḥ tapaḥkṣamam ŚĀK. 17. nāvam — ūrmikṣamām MBH. 1, 5639.

— c) «einer Sache gewachsen, tüchtig, vermögend, im Stande» AK. 3, 4,

23, 144. H. 491. H. an. MED. m. 4. 5. Die Ergänzung im loc.:

kṛśānaśvānsamarthānadhvani kṣamān N. 19, 12. sā hi rakṣaṇavidhau

tayoḥ kṣamā RAGH. 11, 5. im infin.: mahānta eva mahatāmarthaṁ

sādhayituṁ kṣamāḥ PAÑCAT. V, 30. vayaṁ tyaktuṁ na tāni kṣamāḥ

ŚĀNTIŚ. 1, 4. RAGH. 8, 59. VID. 74. kiṁcittatra vidhātumakṣamatayā

SĀH. D. 34, 6. im comp. vorangehend: upakārakṣamaṁ mitram «ein

Freund der Einem einen Dienst zu erweisen vermag» R. 4, 7, 20.

agamanakṣama, gamanakṣama 63, 13. karmanirmūlana- BHARTṚ. 3, 90.

paṅkajaparīhāsakṣame locane 1, 5. HIT. I, 27. VID. 240. H. 309. na

sṛṣṭyādikṣamatvam Sch. zu KAP. 1, 95. — d) «gewogen»: na hi te

rāghavādanyaḥ kṣamaḥ puravare vaset R. 2, 35, 31. — e) «erträglich»:

patikule tava dāsyamapi kṣamam ŚĀK. 123. — f) «geeignet, passend,

angemessen, recht, erspriesslich»; = yukta und hita AK. H. an. MED.

śrutvā ca kriyatāṁ kṣamam BRĀHMAṆ. 3, 2. R. 4, 16, 50. 6, 89, 20.

avaśyaṁ tu kṣamaṁ vācyo mayā tvam 95, 55. (samādeśam) yuktamiha

cānyatra ca kṣamam 5, 47, 3. na kṣamamidam MĀLAV. 28, 21.

yadakṣamam (karma) BHĀG. P. 1, 14, 43. ekatra ciravāsaśca kṣamo na

ca mato mama MBH. 1, 6417. yoṣitsu tadvīryaniṣekabhūmiḥ saiva kṣamā

KUMĀRAS. 3, 16. R. 5, 29, 9. 66, 15. Mit dem gen. der Person:

yatkṣamaṁ kauravāṇāṁ hitaṁ pathyaṁ dhṛtarāṣṭrasyaiva ca MBH. 3,

252. kimetadvaḥ kṣamaṁ gāvo yanmāṁ nehābhinandatha 13, 3863. 14,

1704. 1706. R. 1, 1, 49. 23, 3. 3, 11, 18. 41, 39. 43, 36. 4, 9, 40. 14, 22.

32, 17. 49, 14. 16. tadalaṁ te vanaṁ gatvā kṣamaṁ na hi vanaṁ tava 2,

28, 25. yā kṣamā me gatirgantuṁ gamiṣye havyavāhanam 6, 101, 21.

BHĀG. P. 6, 3, 10. KIR. 1, 45. na hi mama

harirājasaṁśrayātkṣamataramasti R. 4, 23, 12. bhavatsakāśamāgantuṁ

kṣamaṁ mama na veti vai MBH. 14, 1703. BRĀHMAṆ. 1, 35. R. 2, 24, 17.

47, 9. 4, 14, 19. 23, 12. «sich zu Etwas eignend, Etwas entsprechend, das

geeignete Object von» oder «für Etwas seiend»; die Ergänzung im dat.:

api kṣamaṁ no grahaṇāya «welche» (Kenntniss) «auch von uns erfasst

werden kann» BHĀG. P. 3, 4, 18. sa (dvijaḥ) kṣamastāraṇāya MBH. 3,

13424. im gen.: malino hi yathādarśo rūpālokasya na kṣamaḥ. tathā

vipakvakaraṇa ātmā jñānasya na kṣamaḥ.. YĀJÑ. 3, 141. im loc.: ye ‘sya

strīdarśane kṣamāḥ R. 4, 38, 26. im infin.: na sa kṣamaḥ kopayitum «er

ist nicht ein solcher, den man erzürnen dürfte» R. 4, 32, 20. na sā

bhedayituṁ kṣamā «nicht kann sie abwendig gemacht werden» MBH. 1,

7423. im comp. vorangehend: tāraṇa- 3, 13425. sparśa- «berührbar» ŚĀK.

27. upabhoga- 4, 4. dṛṣṭikṣamā «sehenswerth» VIKR. 84.

vanavāsakṣamāḥ kriyāḥ R. 2, 30, 42. deśakāla- 5, 49, 1. 7. āyati- «für die

Zukunft sich eignend, in der Folge Nutzend versprechend» M. 7, 208. R. 4,

14, 32. anāyati- PAÑCAT. III, 113. devīśabdakṣamā MĀLAV. 87. ŚĀK. 21.

164. RAGH. 1, 13. 9, 50. — 2) m. ein Bein. Śiva’s («der Geduldige») ŚIV. —

3) f. kṣamā a) «Geduld, Langmuth, Nachsicht, indulgentia» AK. H. 391. H.

an. MED. bāhye cādhyātmike caiva duḥkhe cotpādite kvacit. na kupyati na

vā hanti sā kṣamā parikīrtitā.. BṚHASP. im ŚKDR. M. 6, 92. 11, 245.

kṣamayā pṛthivīsamaḥ R. 1, 1, 19. kṣamā rūpaṁ tapasvinām CĀṆ. 46.

vipadi dhairyamathābhyudaye kṣamā BHARTṚ. 2, 53. nāyaṁ bhīṣmo ‘rhati

kṣamām MBH. 2, 1554. tattvayā na kṣamā kāryā śatrūnprati kathaṁ ca

na 3, 1027. brāhmaṇeṣu kṣamānvitaḥ M. 7, 32. na

cetkṣamāmapyahamasya kuryām ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 9. badhārhau vāṁ

vimuñcāmi kṣamayā R. 6, 1, 31. kṣamānvitaṁ śauryam HIT. I, 154. R. 1,

34, 33. 34. SUŚR. 1, 122, 19. BHARTṚ. 2, 70. RAGH. 1, 22. 18, 8.

Personif. HARIV. 14035. PRAB. 74, 2. eine Tochter Daksha’s und

Gemahlin Pulaha’s VP. 54. — b) «Widerstand» P. 1, 3, 33, Sch. — c) «die

Erde» (vgl. 2. kṣam, kṣmā) AK. TRIK. 2, 1, 1. H. 936. H. an. MED.

kṣamātale RĀJA-TAR. 5, 334. kṣamāmaṇḍala PRAB. 35, 15. — d) ein

Bein. der Durgā MATHURĀN. zu AK. DURGĀRCĀT. und DEVĪ-P. im ŚKDR.

— e) N. pr. einer Hirtin BRAHMAV. P. im ŚKDR. — f) N. eines Baumes,

«Acacia Catechu Willd.» (khadira) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) N. eines

Metrums (s. utpalinī) COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 161 (VIII, 6). 86. — h)

«Nacht» (falsche Form für kṣapā) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. akṣama,

akṣamā.

kṣama 1) c) mahatyalpe ‘pyupāyajñaḥ samameva bhavetkṣamaḥ Spr.

2142. babhūva jaḍavatso ‘pi siddhāntaṁ kartumakṣamaḥ Verz. d. Oxf. H.

23,b, N. 5. — e) adharmayuktaiścapalairapaṇḍitairna pāpamitraiḥ saha

vartituṁ kṣamam Spr. 2729. — 3) a) «Zahmheit» (einer Gazelle) R. 3, 49,

25. — c) Spr. 552. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 10. PAÑCAR. 3, 2, 27. yamapatnī

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 23,b,6. «Erdboden» BHAṬṬ. 3, 22. «Erde» als «Stoff» Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 104,b,28. — d) als Verfasserin von Mantra bei den Śākta

101,b,8. — g) Ind. St. 8, 386. — 4) m. «eine Art Sperling» RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. u. gṛhakartar. — Vgl. bahu-.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kṣama kṣam + a,

I. adj., f. mā.

1. Enduring, Draup. 6, 4.

2. Endurable, Śāk. d. 123.

3. Able, Pañc. v. d. 30.

4. Favourable, Rām. 2, 35, 31.

5. Useful, Man. 7, 208.

6. Suitable, MBh. 14, 703.

II. f. mā,

1. Patience, forbearance, Rām. 1, 1, 19.

2. The earth, Rājat. 5, 334.

— Comp. āyati-, adj. useful in future time, Man. 7, 208. upabhoga-, adj.

abounding in enjoyment, Śāk. 4, 4. kālāntara-, i. e. kāla-antara-, adj.

suffering delay, Mālav. 28, 8. dṛṣṭi-, adj. worth to be looked on, Vikr. d.

84. deśa-kāla-, adj. in accordance with place and time, Rām. 5, 49, 1.

vana-vāsa-, adj. suitable to a sojourn in a forest, Rām. 2, 30, 42.

— Cf. [greek] + [greek] etc., and ved. kṣam = [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṣama a. patient; enduring, resisting (—°); propitious, friendly; tolerable;

able to, capable of (loc., infin., or —°); suitable, fit, proper for (dat., gen.,

loc., inf., or —°). f. kṣamā patience, forbearance, indulgence (gen. or

prati); the earth.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṣama kṣam-a, a. patient; enduring (-°); capable of, able to, equal to

(in., lc., or -°); endurable; suitable, useful, favourable (for, d., g., lc., inf.,

or -°; inf. or -° after verbal N. having a passive sense): -tvā, f., -tva, n.

capacity for, ability to (lc. or -°).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kṣama u ir bha ya marṣe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (divāṁ—paraṁ—

sakaṁ—seṭ . uditvāt ktvāveṭ .) marṣaḥ sahanam . u, kṣamitvā kṣāntvā .

ṣaṣṭhasvarānubandha ityeke . i ra, akṣamat akṣamīt . asmāt

puṣāditvānnityaṁ ṅa ityanye . bha ya, kṣāmyati doṣaṁ sādhuḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

kṣama ū ṅa ñi ṣa marṣe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (mvāṁ—ātmaṁ—

sakaṁ—veṭ .) ū, akṣamiṣṭa akṣaṁsta . ṅa, kṣamate . ñi, kṣanto’sti . ṣa,

kṣamā . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṣama sahane bhvādi° ātma° saka° veṭ . kṣamate akṣamiṣṭa akṣaṁsta

cakṣame kṣāntaḥ kṣāttiḥ . kṣamitā kṣantā . indra tvā yajñaḥ kṣamamāṇa

mānaṭ ṛ° 10 . 103 . 6 . yonityaṁ kṣamate tāta! bahūn lokān sa vindati

bhā° va° 1035 ślo° . kārpaṇyāt sādhubhāvācca kuntī rājanna cakṣape

bhā° ā° 157 a° . ṛte raveḥ kṣālayituṁ kṣameta kaḥ māghaḥ kurusthyaṁ

bhīru! yattebhyodruhadbho’pi kṣamāmahe ṭṭiḥ . ṣit kṣamā tejaḥ kṣamā

vānaikāntam māghaḥ paidike tu ni° kṣamati kṣamiti . iti pā .

kṣama sahane divā° para° saka° seṭ śamādi° irit . kṣāmyati akṣamat

akṣanīt . cakṣāma kāmaṁ kṣāmyatu yaḥ kṣamī māghaḥ .

kṣama na° kṣama—aca . 1 yuddhe . 2 śakte, ruṣituṁ sahituṁ raṇe—

kākutsthaṁ bhīru! kaḥ kṣamaḥ bhaṭṭiḥ ātmakarbha kṣayaṁ dehas raghuḥ

priyāsu bālāsu ratakṣamāsu ca naipra° 4 kṣamāvati tri° ato’tra 3 hite,

kiñcit bhavatīṁ bahukṣamām kumā° .

क्षिति — kṣiti Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṣiti f. dominion (Comm.)

kṣiti f. an abode, dwelling, habitation, house (cf. also «uru-» and «su-kṣiti,

dhruva».)

kṣiti f. ( i, 1) the earth, soil of the earth &c.

f. the number «one»

kṣiti f. («ayas») f. settlements, colonies, races of men, nations (of which

five are named; cf. «kṛṣṭi»)

kṣiti f. (said of the families of the gods) iii, 20, 4

f. estates (cf. «uru-» and «su-kṣiti, dhārayat-, dhruva-, bhava-, raṇa-,

samara-«.)

kṣiti f. wane, perishing, ruin, destruction

f. the period of the destruction of the universe, end of the world (cf.

«a-, asura-«.)

kṣiti 3.

kṣiti see 1. 2. and 4. «kṣi».

kṣiti m. N. of a man

kṣiti f. a sort of yellow pigment

m. a sort of base metal

kṣiti m. = «kṣiti-kṣama» (s.v. 2. «kṣiti»)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṣiti (von 1. kṣi) f. 1) «Wohnsitz, Niederlassung» AK. 3, 4, 14, 73. H. an.

2, 162. MED. t. 10. dhruvāsu kṣitiṣu kṣiyantaḥ ṚV. 7, 88, 7. 1, 73, 4. kṣeti

kṣitīḥ subhago nāma puṣyan 5, 37, 4. kṣitirna pṛthvī 1, 65, 5 (3). tā naḥ

kṣitīḥ karatamūrjayantīḥ 7, 65, 2. 3, 13, 4. 6, 65, 1. dhruvakṣiti adj. BHĀG.

P. 4, 9, 5. — 2) «Erde, Erdboden» NAIGH. 1, 1. AK. 2, 1, 2. 3, 4, 14, 74.

23, 144. H. 936. H. an. MED. M. 4, 241. 5, 73. 8, 38. 39. 9, 263. N. 5, 23.

13, 8. R. 3, 32, 16. SUŚR. 1, 20, 6. 153, 1. ŚĀK. 179. RAGH. 3, 31. BHĀG.

P. 4, 8, 56. kṣititala BHARTṚ. 3, 5. PAÑCAT. 63, 17. 230, 18.

kṣititalāpsarāḥ «eine auf der Erde wandelnde» Aps. KATHĀS. 17, 34.

kṣitidhenu «die als Milchkuh gedachte Erde» BHARTṚ. 2, 38. — 3) pl.

concr. «die Niederlassungen» so v. a. «Stämme, Völkerschaften; Völker,

Menschen» überh. NAIGH. 2, 3. kratūyanti kṣitayo yoge ṚV. 4, 24, 4. anu

krośanti kṣitayo bhareṣu 38, 5. indra prarājasi kṣitīḥ 8, 6, 26. 16, 9. 5, 1,

10. 32, 10. 36, 6. purudruho hi kṣitayo janānām 3, 38, 1. «die fünf

Niederlassungen» d. h. «Völker» (s. u. kṛṣṭi): pañca

kṣitīrmānuṣīrbodhayantī 7, 79, 1. 75, 4. pañca kṣitīnāṁ vasu 1, 176, 3. 7,

9. 5, 35, 2. 6, 46, 7. Indra heisst vṛṣabhaḥ kṣitīnām 1, 177, 3. 6, 32, 4. 7,

98, 1. Agni varṣiṣṭhaḥ kṣi- 5, 7, 1. die Āditya mūrdhānaḥ kṣi- 8, 56, 3.

Uebertragen auch von «Göttergeschlechtern»: agnirnetā bhaga iva

kṣitīnāṁ daivīnām ṚV. 3, 20, 4. — Vgl. urukṣiti, dhārayat-, dhruva-,

bhava-, raṇa-, samara-, su-.

kṣiti (von 3. kṣi) f. 1) «das Vergehen, Untergang, Verderben» AK. 3, 4, 14,

73. H. an. 2, 162. MED. t. 10. brahmajyasya kṣitirhi sā AV. 12, 5, 16. 23.

11, 7, 25. 8, 4. 26. Vgl. akṣiti, asurakṣiti. — 2) «Weltende» MED.

kṣiti f. «ein best. Parfum» (s. rocanā) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR.

kṣiti m. N. pr. eines Mannes; pl. PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 58.

kṣiti 2) pl. «Ländereien» RĀJA-TAR. 5, 109.

kṣiti «ein best. Halbmetall» (uparasa) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 321,a, No. 761. —

Vgl. kṣitināga.

kṣiti (von 2. kṣi) f. = aiśvarya (nach dem Schol.) MBH. 13, 3674.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kṣiti 1. kṣi + ti, f.

1. An abode, Bhāg. P. 4, 9, 5.

2. The earth, Bhartṛ. 3, 5.

3. Land, Rājat. 5, 109.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṣiti [1] f. abode, settlement, the earth; pl. the settlements, i.e. tribes,

nations, men, people.

kṣiti [2] f. destruction, decay, end.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṣiti 1. kṣi-ti, f. abode, dwelling; earth, land: pl. the tribes, races,

peoples, men.

kṣiti 2. kṣi-ti, f. destruction.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṣiti strī kṣi—nivāse ādhāre ktin . 1 bhūmau, nipīya yasya kṣitirakṣiṇaḥ

kathām naiṣa° . bhāve ktin . 2 nivāse kṣi—kṣaye bhāve—ktin . 3 kṣaye,

kartari ktic . 4 rocanākhyogandhadravye śabdaca05manuṣye nigha° ..

indra! prarājasi kṣitīḥ ṛ° 8, 6, 26 kṣitormanuṣyān bhā0! prajāsu tā naḥ

kṣitīḥ karatamūrjayantīm ṛ° 7, 66, 2, dhruvāsu kṣitiṣu kṣiyantaḥ ṛ° 7, 88,

7, pañca kṣitīrmānuṣīrvodhayantī 7, 79, 1 . kṣitīrhi sā atha° 12, 5, 16 . kṣi

kṣaye ādhāre ktin . 6 pralayakāle medi° . kṣitiśabdaniruktiḥ brahmavai°

pu° prā° kha° 7 a° . mahālaye kṣayaṁ yāti kṣitistena prakīrtitā .

asminpakṣe kartari ktic iti bhedaḥ .

क्षोणिः — kṣoṇiḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

kṣoṇiḥ , kṣoṇī f.

(1) The earth.

(2) The number ‘one’ (in math.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kṣoṇiḥ strī, (kṣai + bāhulakāt ḍoniḥ vā ṅīp .) pṛthivī . iti śabdaratnāvalī ..

amaraṭīkā ca .. (yathā, ṛgvede 1 . 54 . 1 .

akrandayo nadyo’roruvadvanā kathā na kṣoṇībhiryasā samārata ..)

क्ष्मा — kṣmā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṣmā f. (cf. 2. «kṣam» the earth &c.

kṣmā f. («ayā») instr. ind. (= 1. «kṣamā») on the earth

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṣmā

(1) The earth; (putraṁ) kṣmāṁ laṁbhayitvā kṣamayopapannaṁ R.

18. 9; kiṁ śeṣasya bharavyathā na vapuṣi kṣmāṁ na kṣipatyeṣa yat Mu.

2. 18.

(2) (In math.) The number ‘one’.

— Comp.

—jaḥ the planet Mars.

—paḥ, —patiḥ, —bhuj m. a king; kavikṣmāpatiḥ Gīt. 1;

deśānāmupari kṣmāpāḥ Pt. 1. 155.

—bhṛt m. a king or mountain.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṣmā f. Uṇ. 5, 65. «die Erde» NAIGH. 1, 1. NIR. 10, 7. AK. 2, 1, 3. H. 936.

Im Veda nur instr. sg. kṣmayā neben kṣamā (s. u. 2. kṣam). kṣmā nom.

BHĀG. P. 7, 8, 33. kṣmām R. 3, 35, 63. BHARTṚ. 2, 69. RAGH. 18, 8.

BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 17. 4, 16, 23. DEV. 9, 20. PRAB. 118, 3. kṣmāśayana MBH.

3, 13456. kṣmānta PAÑCAT. III, 49. kṣmātale MĀRK. P. 23, 47. kṣmāṁśa

AK. 3, 4, 7, 34. — Vgl. kṣamā.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kṣmā kṣmā, a syncope of kṣam + ā, f. The earth, Bhartṛ. 2, 69.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṣmā f. the earth; only instr. kṣmayā on the earth.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṣmā kṣmā, f. earth, land: in. kṣmayā, on the earth.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kṣmā strī, (kṣamate sahate bhāraṁ aparādhajanitaṁ vātmasthānāṁ

jīvānāṁ caturvidhānāṁ iti . kṣam + ac upadhāyāḥ lopaśca .) pṛthvī .

ityamaraḥ . 2 . 67 . 3 .. (yathā, bhāgavate . 7 . 8 . 33 .

dyaustat saṭotkṣiptavimānasaṅkulā protsarpata kṣmā ca padātipīḍitā

..)

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṣmā strī kṣamate bhāraṁ kṣama—ac upadhālopaśca . 1 dharāyām .

amaraḥ kṣmāṁ lambhayitvā kṣamayopapannam raghuḥ . nacodaka

praveśena na ca kṣmāśayanādapi bhā° va° 199 a° . kṣmayā carati pari sā

vṛṇaktu naḥ niru° dhṛtā ṛk 2 ekasaṁkhyāyāñca .

चंद्र — caṁdra Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

caṁdra a. [caṁṭ ṇic rak] Ved.

(1) Glittering, bright, shining (as gold).

(2) Lovely, beautiful. —draḥ

(1) The moon: yathā prahlādanāccaṁdraḥ R. 4. 12; hṛtacaṁdrā

tamaseva kaumudī 8. 37; na hi saṁharate jyotsnāṁ

cadraścāṁḍālaveśmani H. 1. 61; mukha-, vadana- &c.; paryāptacaṁdreva

śarattriyāmā Ku. 7. 26 (for mythological account see soma).

(2) The moon, as a planet.

(3) Campher; vilepanasyādhikacaṁdrabhāgatāvibhāvanāccāpalalāpa

pāṁḍutāṁ N. 1. 51.

(4) The eye in a peacock’s tail.

(5) Water.

(6) Gold (n. also).

(7) A lovely or agreeable phenomenon.

(8) A spot similar to the moon

(9) The symbol or mark of a Visarga. (10) A reddish kind of pearl.

(11) The fifth lunar mansion.

(12) The number ‘one’. (Used at the end of comp. caṁdra means

‘excellent’, ’eminent’, or ‘illustrious’; as puruṣacaṁdraḥ ‘a moon of men’,

an excellent or illustrious man). —drā

(1) Small cardamoms.

(2) An open hall only furnished with a roof.

(3) An awning, a canopy.

— Comp.

—aṁśuḥ 1. Viṣṇu. —2. a moon-beam.

—ardhaḥ the half moon; Pt. 4. -cūḍāmaṇiḥ, -moliḥ, -śekharaḥ

epithets of Śiva.

—ātapaḥ 1. moon-light. —2. awning. —3. an open hall only

furnished with a roof.

—ātmajaḥ, —aurasaḥ, —jaḥ, —jātaḥ, —tanayaḥ, —naṁdanaḥ, —

putraḥ the planet Mercury.

—ānana a. moon-faced. (

—naḥ) an epithet of Kārtikeya.

—āpīḍaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—ābhāsaḥ ‘false moon’, an appearance in the sky resembling the

real moon.

—āhvayaḥ camphor.

—iṣṭā a lotus plant, or a collection of lotuses, blossoming during

the night.

—udayaḥ 1. moon-rise. —2. awning. —3. a mercurial preparation

used in medicine. (

—yā) a kind of medicine for the eyes.

—upalaḥ the moon-stone.

—kalā 1. a digit of the moon; rāhoścaṁdrakalāmivānanacarīṁ

daivātsamāsādya me Mal. 5. 28. —2. the crescent before or after the new

moon.

—kāṁtaḥ, —māṇiḥ the moonstone (supposed to ooze away under

the influence of the moon); dravati ca hinaraśmāvudgate cadrakāṁtaḥ U.

6. 12; Śi. 4. 58; Amaru 57; Bh. 1. 21; Mal. 1. 24. (

—taḥ —taṁ) the white eatable water-lily blossoming during the

night. (

—taṁ) sandal-wood.

—kāṁtā 1. a night. —2. the wife of the moon. —3. moon-light.

—kāṁtiḥ f. moon-light. (—n.) silver.

—kṣayaḥ the new-moon-day or the last day of a lunar month (amā)

when the moon is not visible.

—gṛhaṁ the fourth sign of the zodiac, Cancer.

—golaḥ the world of the moon, lunar sphere. -rathaḥ a deceased

progenitor, the manes.

—golikā moonlight.

—grahaṇaṁ an eclipse of the moon.

—caṁ valā a small fish

—cūḍaḥ, —mauliḥ, śekharaḥ, —cūḍāmaṇiḥ epithets of Śiva; (‘having

the moon for his crest’, ‘moon-crested’); rahasyupālabhyata

caṁdraśekharaḥ Ku. 5. 58, 86; R. 6. 34.

—dārāḥ (m. pl.) ‘the wives of the moon’, the 27 lunar mansions

mythologically regarded as so many daughters of Daksha and married to

the moon.

—dyutiḥ sandal-wood. (—f.) moon-light.

—nāman m. camphor.

—nibha a. bright, handsome.

—paṁcāgaṁ the luni-solar calendar.

—pādaḥ a moon-beam; Me. 70; Mal. 3. 12.

—prabhā moon-light.

—bālā 1. large cardamoms. —2. moon-light.

—biṁdu the sign for the nasal (ṁ). —bhasman n. camphor.

—bhāgā N. of a river in the south.

—bhāsaḥ a sword; see caṁdrahāsa. —bhūti n. silver.

—maṇiḥ the moon-stone.

—maṁḍalaṁ 1. the orb or disc of the moon. —2. the lunar sphere.

—3. a halo round the moon.

—mukhī a moon-faced (i. e. lovely) woman.

—rekhā, lekhā the digit or streak of the moon.

—reṇuḥ a plagiarist.

—lokaḥ the world of the moon.

—lohakaṁ, —lauhaṁ, —lauhakaṁ silver.

—vaṁśaḥ the lunar race of kings, the second great line of royal

dynasties in India.

—vadana a. a moon-faced.

—vrataṁ 1. a kind of vow or penance = cāṁdrāyaṇa q. v. —2. a

regal property or virtue.

—śālā 1 a room on the top (of a house &c.); viyadgataḥ

puṣpakacaṁdraśālāḥ kṣaṇaṁ pratiśrunmukharāḥ karoti R. 13. 40. —2.

moonlight.

—śālikā a room on the top of a house.

—śilā the moon-stone; Bk. 11. 15.

—saṁjñaḥ camphor.

—saṁbhavaḥ N. of Budha or Mercury. (

—vā) small cardamoms.

—sālokya attainment of the lunar heaven.

—han m. an epithet of Rāhu.

—hāsaḥ 1. a glittering sword. —2. the sword of Ravaṇa; he

pāṇayaḥ kimiti vāṁchatha caṁdrahāsaṁ B. R. 1. 56, 61. —3. N. of a king

of Kerala, son of Sudhārmika. [He was born under the Mūla asterism and

his left foot had a redundant toe; for this his father was killed by his

enemies, and the boy was left an orphan in a state of destitution. After

much exertion he was restored to his kingdom. He became a friend of

Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna when they came to the South in the course of their

wanderings with the sacrificial horse.] (

—saṁ) silver.

चन्द्र — candra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899candra mf («ā») n. (fr. «ścandra» q.v.) glittering, shining (as gold), having

the brilliancy or hue of light (said of gods, of water [ x, 121, 9 vi] and of

Soma)

candra m. the moon (also personified as a deity &c.) &c. (ifc. f. «ā»

&c.)

candra m. ifc. «the moon of» i.e. the most excellent among (e.g.

«pārthiva-» [g. «vyāghrādi» or «narendra-» [ i, 4], «a most excellent king»)

candra m. the number «one»

candra m. a lovely or agreeable phenomenon of any kind

candra m. a spot similar to the moon

candra m. the eye in a peacock’s tail

candra m. the mark of the Visarga, Tantr.

candra m. a kind of reddish pearl

candra m. camphor

candra m. water

candra m. the Kāmpilla plant

candra m. a metre of 4 x 19 syllables

candra m. N. of a Daitya (= «-varman», king of the Kāmbojas)

candra m. of a son of Kṛiṣṇa

candra m. of a son of Viśva-gandhi and father of Yuvanāśva, ix, 6, 20

candra m. of a grammarian (= «-gomin»)

candra m. of a king

candra m. of one of the ancestors of the Gauḍa Brāhmans

candra m. of several other men vi f.

candra m. one of the 18 minor Dvipas

candra m. = «-parvata»

candra n. ( i, 2; also m. gold

candra n. a kind of sour rice-gruel

candra n. N. of a Sāman

candra mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a hall covered only at the top, awning, canopy

candra n. cardamoms

candra n. Cocculus cordifolius («guḍūcī»)

candra n. = «-drāspadā»

candra n. N. of a river

candra mf («ā») n. («ī») f. Serratula anthelminthica (cf. «ardha-«.)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

candra (von cand) Uṇ. 2, 13. 1) adj. f. ā; die vollständigere Form ścandra

findet sich ṚV. 3, 31, 15. 4, 2, 13. 8, 54, 11 und in den compp.

aśvaścandra, puru-, viśva-, su-, sva-, hari-; vgl. ṚV. PRĀT. 4, 37.

«schimmernd, lichtfarbig (die Farbe des Goldes)»: hiraṇya ṚV. 8, 54, 11.

9, 97, 50. 10, 107, 7. agne retaścandraṁ hiraṇyam TBR. 1, 2, 1, 4. bhānu

ṚV. 1, 48, 9. Ushas 157, 1. Agni 3, 3, 5. die Āditya 7, 62, 3. andere Götter

8, 20, 20. 4, 9. vasūni 5, 42, 3. 9, 69, 10. candraṁ rayiṁ puruvīraṁ

bṛhantaṁ candra candrābhirgṛṇate yuvasya 6, 6, 7. ratna 4, 2, 13. vahatu

10, 85, 21. ratha 4, 48, 1. Wasser: yaścāpaścandrā bṛhatīrjajāna 10, 121,

9. yannaktaṁ bhavatyapo ‘haḥ praviśati tasmāccandrā āpo naktaṁ

dadṛśre TS. 6, 4, 2, 4. Soma ṚV. 3, 40, 4. agne yatte śukraṁ yaccandram

VS. 12, 104. 4, 18. 21. 8, 43. — 2) m. a) «der Mond, der Mondgott» AK. 1,

1, 2, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 348. H. 105. H. an. 2, 417. MED. r. 31. AV. 2, 15, 2.

22, 1. 3, 31, 6 u.s.w. VS. 22, 28. 39, 2. ŚAT. BR. 6, 2, 2, 16. 14, 4, 1, 20.

3, 20. 5, 1, 3. -tārakam 6, 7, 13. -lokāḥ 6, 1. pūrṇa- R. 5, 18, 26. N. 16,

22. paripūrṇa M. 9, 309. -kṣaya 3, 122. na hi saṁharate jyotsnāṁ

candraścaṇḍālaveśmani HIT. I, 55. Personif. M. 7, 4. 8, 86. 9, 303.

candrasyaiti salokatām 11, 220. -sālokya 4, 231. Lot. de la b. l. 2. LALIT.

52 u.s.w. Gehört zu den Jyotiṣka H. 92. Am Ende eines adj. comp. f. āḥ

naṣṭacandrā yathā rātriḥ MBH. 9, 221. MṚCCH.65, 4. hīnacandreva rajanī

R. 2, 76, 9. 3, 52, 18. KUMĀRAS. 7, 26. PRAB. 7, 6. GĪT. 7, 15. — b) «der

Mond» als «schönstes Gestirn» bezeichnet in der Zusammensetzung das

«Vorzüglichste seiner Art»: pārthivacandra gaṇa vyāghrādi zu P. 2, 1, 56.

— c) «eine liebliche, erfreuliche Erscheinung» H. an. VYĀḌI bei BHAR. zu

AK. ŚKDR. — d) «ein mondähnlicher Fleck»: daśacandramasim —

śatacandram BHĀG. P. 4, 15, 17. — e) «das Auge im Pfauenschweife»

(vgl. candraka) H. an. — f) «das» Visarga-«Zeichen» ŚKDR. nach einem

TANTRA. — g) «Gold» (vgl. n.) AK. 3, 4, 25, 184. H. an. MED. — h) «eine

röthliche Perle» VYĀḌI bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR. — i) «Wasser» H. an.

MED. — k) «Kampfer» AK. 2, 6, 3, 32. TRIK. H. 643. H. an. MED. — l)

«eine best. Pflanze», = kāmpilla AK. 2, 4, 5, 12. H. an. MED. — m) N.

eines Metrums (metrical sequence) COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 163 (XIV, 11).

— n) N. pr. eines Daitja (ident. mit Candravarman, König der Kāmboja;

vgl. candramas) MBH. 1, 2667. eines Sohnes des Viśvagandhi und Vaters

des Yuvanāśva BHĀG. P. 9, 6, 20. eines Grammatikers (vgl. candragomin)

COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 6. 20. 39. 48. BÖHTL. in der Einl. zu P. II, xv. fgg.

WEST. in der praef. zu den Radd. III. fg. -vyākaraṇa WASSILJEW 208.

RĀJA-TAR. 1, 176. verschiedener Männer 6, 350. 7, 97. 358. 1351. eines

Königs PAÑCAT. V, 61. 253, 10. eines der Stammväter der Gauḍa-

Brahmanen COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 188. = candragupta LIA. II, 202. — o)

N. pr. eines Dvīpa ŚABDAM. im ŚKDR. TROYER in RĀJA-TAR. II, 314. —

p) N. pr. eines Flusses, des einen Hauptarmes der Candrabhāgā LIA. I,

Anh. XLI. — q) N. pr. eines Berges R. 6, 26, 6. -parvata 2, 37. — 3) f.

candrā a) «eine nur von oben gedeckte Halle» ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b)

«Kardamomen» ebend. — c) «Cocculus cordifolius Dec.» (guḍūcī) ŚKDR.

(iti kecit). — 4) f. candrī «Serratula anthelminthica Roxb.» (vākucī)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 5) n. a) «Gold» NAIGH. 1, 2. H. 1044. RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. tamukṣamāṇaṁ rajasi sva ā dame candramiva surucaṁ hvāra ā

dadhuḥ ṚV. 2, 2, 4. 3, 31, 15. sīsaṁ kravyādapi candraṁ ta āhuḥ AV. 12,

2, 53. candraṁ (somaṁ) candreṇa (krīṇāmi) VS. 4, 26. 19, 93. ŚAT. BR.

3, 3, 3, 4. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 8, 15. PAÑCAV. BR. 6, 6. — b) «eine Art saurer

Reisschleim» (cukra) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. eines Sāman KĀTY. ŚR.

26, 4, 1. LĀṬY. 1, 6, 24. Ind. St. 3, 216. — Vgl. ardhacandra.

candra 1) candrataram adv. «lieblicher»: strī naktaṁ candrataraṁ vadati

KĀṬH. 30, 1. — 2) a) der «Mond» als Bez. «der Zahl Eins» SŪRYAS. 1, 43.

2, 21. — n) ein Sohn Kṛṣṇa’s BHĀG. P. 10, 61, 13. Z. 7 streiche 1351. — 5)

a) HALĀY. 2, 18. hierher etwa auch ṚV. 3, 61, 7.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

candra 1 I A prominent asura, also called Candravarman. It was this

asura, as beautiful as Candra (the moon) who was born as the king of

Kāmboja under the name Candravarman (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 67,

Verse 31).

candra 2 II A king born in the Solar dynasty and the son of Viśvarandhi

and father of Yuvanāśva. See Vaṁśāvalī)

candra 3 III The Purāṇas declare that Candra was one of the invaluable

things got at the churning of Kṣīrābdhi (ocean of milk) Candra,

Mahālakṣmī, Surā, Uccaiḥśravas, Kaustubha, Pārijāta, Kāmadhenu,

Dhanvantari, Amṛtam and Kālakūṭa were the things thus got from the

Ocean of Milk. (M.B. Ādi Parva, Chapter 18 and Viṣṇu Purāṇa, Part 1,

Chapter 9). Also, the evil devatā called Jyeṣṭhā, Airāvata, the gem named

Cintāmaṇi and fair damsels like Tārā and Rumā were got from the

Kṣīrābdhi, (Kampa Rāmāyaṇa, Yuddhakāṇḍa). For general information

about Candra, see Grahas).

candra 4 IV (CANDRA DEVA).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

candra cand + ra, m.

1. The moon, MBh. 11, 220.

2. A moon-like spot, Bhāg. P. 4, 15, 7.

3. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2667.

4. The name of a mountain, Rām. 6, 26, 6.

— Comp. ardha-, see separately. pūrṇa-, m. the full of the moon, Rām. 3,

53, 44. rāma-, m. the second of the three renowned Rāmas, the son of

Daśaratha, and hero of the Rāmāyaṇa. śaraccandra, i. e. śarad-, m. the

autumnal moon.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

candra a. shining, glittering, brilliant, bright. — m. the moon (often

personif.), moon i.e. chief among (—°).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

candra cand-ra, a. shining, bright; lovely; m. moon (also as a deity); -° =

chief among —; N.; n. gold: a-ka, m. (-° a. ikā) moon; eye in a peacock’s

tail; N.;

-kalā, f. sixteenth part of the moon’s disc (as seen on the day before

or after new moon);

-kānta, a. lovely as the moon; m. moon-stone (a fabulous gem formed

of the congealed rays of the moon, glittering & exuding cool moisture in

moonlight only): -maṇi-maya, a. made of moonstone, -maya, a. id..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

candra pu° cadi—āhlāde ṇic—rak . vyomasthe jalamaye maṇḍalākāre

(cāṁda) khyāte padārthe . tanmaṇḍalamānādi induśabde 955 . 56 pṛ°

uktam . sa ca grahabhedaḥ tadadhiṣṭhāvṛdevādi grahayajñaśabde 2757

pṛ° darśitam . adhikaminduśabde 930 pṛṣṭhādau dṛśyam . tasyotpattiḥ

atrijaśabde 111 pṛ° uktam . tadvaṁśādi harivaṁśe bhāgavate ca dṛśyam .

candrasya digvalavarṇādijñānāya sarvagrahāṇāṁ digbalādyucyate tatra

jyo° ta° raktaśyāmobhāskarogauraindurnātyuccāṅgoraktagauromahījaḥ .

dūrvāśyāmojñogururgauragātraḥ śyāmaḥ śukrobhāskariḥ kṛṣṇadehaḥ .

sūryaḥ śukraḥ kṣamāputraḥ saiṁhikeyaḥ śaniḥ śaśī .

saumyastridaśamantrī ca prācyādidigadhīśvarāḥ . prācyāṁ

saumyasurācāryau yāmyā bhāskarabhūmijau . pratyak saurirudīcyāntu

sitendū digvalānvitau . bhaumārkajīvāḥ puruṣāḥ klīvau somajabhānujau .

stryākhyau bhārgavacandrau dvau tatpatitvāttathocyate .

candrārkajīvājñasitau kūjākīṁ yathākrama satvarajastamāṁsi .

kaṭulavaṇatiktamiśritamadhurāmlau ca kaṣāyako’rkataḥ . brāhmaṇe

śukravāgośau kṣatriye bhaumabhāskarau . candrovaiśye budhaḥ śūdre

patirmando’ntyaje jane . ṛgvedādhipatirjīvoyajuryedādhipaḥ sitaḥ .

sāmavedādhipobhaumaḥ śaśijo’tharvavedarāṭ .

madhupiṅgarādṛkcaturaśratanuḥ pittaprakṛtiḥ savitālpakacaḥ .

tanuvṛttatanurbahuvātakaphaḥprājñaśaśī mṛduvāk śubhadṛk .

bhūmijastaruṇabhūrtirudāraḥ paittikaḥ sucapalaḥ kṛśamadhyaḥ . śliṣṭāk

satatahāsyarucirjñaḥ pittamārutakaphaprakṛtiśca . vṛhattanuḥ

piṅgalamūrdhajekṣaṇovṛhaspatiḥ śreṣṭhamatiḥ kaphātmakaḥ . bhṛguḥ

sukhī kāntavapuḥ sulocanaḥ kaphānilātmā’sitavakramūrdhajaḥ .

mando’lasaḥ kaṣiladṛk kṛśadīrghagātraḥ sthūlo’ṅghrijaḥ

paruṣalomakaco’nilātmā mitrāṇi sūryacchiśibhaumajīvāḥ sūryendujau

sūryaśaśāṅkajīvāḥ . ādityaśukrau ravicandrabhaumā budhārkajau

candrajabhārgavau ca . sitāsitau candramaso na kaścit budhaḥ śaśī

saumyasitau ravīndū . ravīndubhaumā ravitastvamitrā mitrāviśeṣastu

samaḥ pradiṣṭaḥ . budhaḥ kujejyāsphujidarkaputrāḥ, śukrārkajau,

bhaumasurejyamandāḥ . śaniḥ, kujejyau surarājamantrī ravyādito’mī

samasaṁjñitāḥ syuḥ . taccāraphalādikam vṛ° sa° uktam tacca induśabde

931 . 32 pṛ° dṛśyam ardhādūnaḥ śaśī pāpaḥ samayāmṛtam .

adrijātasomasya candralokaprāptikathā kāśīkha° 14 a° . pitā somasya

bho vipra! jajñe’trirbhagavānṛṣiḥ . brahmaṇomānasāt pūrvaṁ

prajāsargaṁ vidhitsataḥ . anuttaraṁ nāma tapo yena taptaṁ hi tat purā .

trīṇi varṣasahasrāṇi divyānīti hi nau śrutam . ūrdhamācakrame tasya

retaḥ somatvamīyivaḥ . netrābhyāṁ tacca susnāva daśadhā

dyotayatdiśaḥ . taṁ garbhavidhinā hṛṣṭā daśa devyo dadhustataḥ .

sametya dhārayāmāsurnaiva tāḥ samaśaknuvan . yadā na dhāraṇe

śaktāstasya garbhasya tā diśa . tatastābhiḥ sajūḥ somoniṣpapāta

vasundharām . patitaṁ somamālokya brahmā lokapitāmahaḥ .

rathamāropayāmāsa lokānāṁ hitakāmyayā . sa tena rathamukhyena

sāgarāntāṁ vasundharām . dviḥ saptakṛtve druhiṇaścakārāye

pradakṣiṇam . tasya yat plāvitantejaḥ pṛthivīmanvapadyata .

tenauṣadhyaḥ samudbhūtā yābhiḥ sandhāryate jagat . sa labdhatejā

bhagavān brahmaṇā vardhitaḥ svayam . tapastepe sahābhāga!

padmānāṁ daśatīrdaśa . avimuktaṁ samāsādya kṣetraṁ

paramapāvanam . saṁsthāpya liṅgamamṛta candreśākhyaṁ khanāmataḥ

. vījoṣadhīnāṁ toyānāṁ rājā’ bhūcca dvijanmanām .

prasādāddevadevasya viśveśasya pinākinaḥ . tatra kuṇḍaṁ

vidhāyaikamamṛtodamiti smṛtam . yasyāmbupānasrānābhyāṁ naro’jñānāt

pramucyate . tuṣṭena devadevena svamaulau yodhṛtaḥ sadā . ādāya

tatkalāmekāṁ jagatsañjīvanīṁ parām . paścāddakṣeṇa śapto’pi māsānte

kṣayamāpya ca . āpyāyyate’sau kalayā punaregha tayā śaśī . sa tat

prāpya mahadrājyaṁ somaḥ somavatāṁ varaḥ . rājasūyaṁ samājahre

sahasraśatadakṣiṇam . dakṣiṇāmadadat soma strilokāniti nau śrutam .

tebhyo brahmarṣimukhyebhyaḥ sadasyebhyaśca bhodvija! . hiraṇyagarbho

brahmātrirbhṛguryatrartvijo’bhavan . sadasyo’bhūddharistatra

bahubhirmunibhirvṛtaḥ . taṁ sinī ca kuhūścaiva dyutiḥ puṣṭiḥ prabhā

vasuḥ . kīrtirdhṛtiśca lakṣmīśca nava devyaḥ siṣevira . umayā sahitaṁ

rudraṁ santarpyādhvarakarmaṇā . prāpa somaiti khyātiṁ dattāṁ somena

śambhunā . tatraiva taptavān somastapaḥ paramaduṣkaram . tatraiva

rājasūyañca cakre candreśvarāgrataḥ . tatraiva brāhmaṇaiḥ

prītairityukto’sau kalānidhiḥ . somo’snākaṁ brāhmaṇānāṁ rājā

trailokyadakṣiṇaḥ . tatraiva devadevasya vilocanapadaṅgataḥ . śambhunā

protamanasā trailokyāhlādahetave . tvaṁ mamāpi parā

mūrtirityuktastattapībalāt! jagattavodayaṁ prāpya bhaviṣyati

sukhodayam . tvatpīyūṣa mayairhastaiḥ spṛṣṭametaccarācaram!

bhānutāpaparītañca parāṁ gnāniṁ vihāsyati . iti dattvā varān

śambhustasmai candramase dvija! . antarhito maheśānastasmin

vaiśveśvare pure . tadārabhya ca loke’smin dvijarājā’dhipo’bhavat . tasya

māsamadhye dakṣaśāpāt kṣayavṛddhī pādme svargakhaṇḍe ukte yathā

aśvinyādyāstu dakṣasya upayeme sutā vidhuḥ . rohiṇyā meva satataṁ

baddhapremā rarāma ha . dṛṣṭvā taditarāstānu taptāḥ pitaramabruvan .

asmākaṁ kāmadastāta . jāmātā tava rohiṇīm . ramayatyeva satataṁ

tena taptā vayaṁ pitaḥ! . tat śrutvā cāpriyaṁ dakṣaḥ somamāha

bhajasva bhoḥ . premṇā samena sarvāstvaṁ duhitṝrmama mānada! .

jagṛhe ta dvaconaiva somaḥ saprema rohiṇīm . tathaiva ramayāmāsa

śrutvā dakṣaścukopa ha . śaśāpa tena bhavitā’pakṣīṇo’smadvacātigaḥ .

yakṣmaṇā ca parigrasto bhava tvaṁ kṣīṇaretakaḥ . aya kṣayamite tasmin

sarvāstāḥ sahitāḥ striyaḥ . pitaraṁ śaraṇaṁ prāptāḥ kṣīyate naḥ patiḥ

pitaḥ! . na vayaṁ tena vartāmo vinā sukhanirākṛtāḥ . uvāca dakṣa stāḥ

sarvā śāpo me nānyathā bhavet . māsamadhye pakṣamekaṁ vardhatāṁ

sa krameṇa vai . kṣayaṁ krameṇa prāpnotu pakṣamekaṁ vyavasthayā .

evaṁ śāpaṁ varañcaiva lebhe tasya vyavasthayā . tathaiva rājate vyomni

kṣayavṛddhī dadhadvidhuḥ . jyotiṣoktatatkāraṇantu induśabde 933 pṛ°

darśitam . 2 āhlādajanakadravyamātre trikā° . 3 karpūre 4 svarṇe 5 jale 6

kāmpille pu° medi° . 7 dvīprabhede śabdamā° . 8 visargavarṇe

tantrasaṁketaḥ cadi—dīptau rak . 9 kamanīye tri° 10 mayūra picche

mecake hemaca° . 11 śoṇamuktāphale vyāḍiḥ . antyapadalope 12

candragupte nṛpe ca . krūragrahaḥ saketuḥ

candramasaṁpūrṇamaṇḍalamidānīm mudrārā° . candraṁ gatā

padmaguṇānna bhuṅkte kumā° . badhūjanaścandramadhaścakāra nāghaḥ

. candracandanarolambarutādyuddīpanaṁ matam sā° da° tasya

śṛṅgārarasoddīpakatvamuktam . svarṇe candrarathaḥ hotā mandraḥ

śṛṇuvaccandrarathaḥ ṛ° 1 . 141 . 12 . 13 hīrake . candrāghiṣṭhātṛke 14

mṛgaśironakṣatre 15 ekāṅke ca .

भू — bhū Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899bhū cl.1.P. ( i, 1) «bhavati» (rarely ā. «-te»; pf. «babhūva», 2. pers. «-

ūtha» or «-ūvitha» cf. ; «babhūyās, -yār, babhūtu» ; ā. «babhūve» or

«bubhūve» ; cf. below; aor. «abhūt, -ūvan»; Impv. «bodhi» [cf. «budh»],

«bhūtu» ; aor. or impf. «abhuvat, bhuvat, bhuvāni» ; Prec. «bhūyāsam», 2.

3. sg. «-yās» ; «bhūyāt» ; «bhūyiṣṭhās» ; «bhaviṣāt» [?] ; «abhaviṣṭa,

bhaviṣīṣta». Gr.; fut. «bhaviṣyati», ep. also «-te» and 2. pl. «-ṣyadhvam;

bhavitā» &c.; inf. «bhuve, -bhve, bhūṣaṇi» ; «bhavitum, -tos» ; ind. p.

«bhūtvā; bhūtvī» ; «-bhūya» &c.; «-bhūyam, -bhavam» , to become, be

(with nom, or adv. or indecl. words ending in «ī» or «ū» cf. «kṛṣṇī-bhū»

&c.), arise, come into being, exist, be found, live, stay, abide, happen,

occur &c. &c. (often used with participles and other verbal nouns to

make periphrastical verbal forms; with a fut. p. = to be going or about to

e.g. «anuvakṣyan bhavati», he is going to recite ; the fut. of «bhū» with a

pf. p. = a fut. pf. e.g. «kṛtavān bhaviṣyasi», you will have done ; the pf. P.

«babhūva» after the syllable «ām» is put for the pf. of verbs of the 10.cl.

&c. [cf. 1. «as» and 1. «kṛ»]; the ā. appears in this meaning xiv. 46;

observe also «bhavati» with a fut. tense, it is possible that, e.g. «bhavati

bhavān yājayiṣyati», it is possible that you will cause a sacrifice to be

performed ; «bhavet», may be, granted, admitted on P. iii, 2. 114;

«bhavatu» id., well, good, enough of this ; «iticed bhavet», if this question

should be asked ; «kva tad bhavati», what is to become of this, it is quite

useless ; with «na» = to cease to exist, perish, die &c.; with «iha na», not

to be born on earth ; with «śata-dhā», to fall into a hundred pieces ; with

«dūrataḥ», to keep aloof. ; with «manasi» or «cetasi» and gen., to occur to

the mind of any one ; id. with gen. alone ; to fall to the share or become

the property of, belong to (cf. «esse alicujus»; «with gen., rarely dat. or

loc. accord. to also with «pari» or «prati» and preceding acc.) &c. &c.; to

be on the side of, assist (with gen. or «-tas») 1301 (cf. ; to serve for,

tend or conduce to (with dat. of thing) &c. &c. (with «phalāya». to bear

fruit ; to be occupied with or engaged in, devote one’s self to (with loc.) ;

to thrive or prosper in (instr.), turn out well, succeed ; to be of

consequence or useful ; (also ā. to fall, or get into, attain to, obtain ;

(with «idam») to obtain it i.e. be successful or fortunate Pass. «bhūyate»

(or «-ti» ; aor. «abhāvi») sometimes used impers. e.g. «yair bhaviṣyate»,

by whom it will be existed i.e. who will be Caus. «bhāvayati» (rarely «-

te»; aor. «abībhavat» Gr.; inf. «bhāvitum» ; Pass. «bhāvyate» &c. , to

cause to be or become, call into existence or life, originate, produce,

cause, create ; to cherish, foster, animate, enliven, refresh, encourage,

promote, further &c.; to addict or devote one’s self to, practise (acc.) ;

to subdue, control ; (also ā. to obtain ; to manifest, exhibit, show, betray

; to purify ; to present to the mind, think about, consider, know,

recognize as or take for (two acc.) &c.; to mingle, mix, saturate, soak,

perfume (cf. «bhāvita», p.755, col.1): Desid. of Caus. «bibhāvayiṣati» ( 7

-4, 80 , to wish to cause to be &c. Desid. «bubhūṣati» («-te»), to wish or

strive to become or be &c. &c.; (with «kṣipram»), to strive to be quickly

possessed ; to want to get on, strive to prosper or succeed ; to want to

have, care for, strive after, esteem, honour ; to want to take revenge

Intens, «bobhavīti, bobhavati, bobhoti, bibhūyate», to be frequently, to be

in the habit of ; to be transformed into (acc.) ; (with «tiraḥ»), to keep

anything (instr.) secret ‘bu’; Gk. [greek]; Lat. ‘fuit’, ‘fuat’ &c.; Slav. ‘byti’;

Lith. ‘buti’; Germ. ‘bim’, ‘bim’; Angl. Sax. ‘beo’; Eng. ‘be’.]

bhū mfn. becoming, being, existing, springing, arising (ifc.; cf. «akṣi-,

giri-, citta-, padmabhū» &c.)

bhū m. N. of Viṣṇu ()

bhū m. of an Ekāha

bhū f. the act of becoming or arising

bhū f. the place of being, space, world or universe (also pl.)

bhū f. the earth (as constituting one of the 3 worlds, and therefore a

symbolical N. for the number «one») &c.

bhū f. one of the three Vyāhṛitis (see «bhuvas, bhūr», pp. 760 and 763)

bhū f. earth (as a substance), ground, soil, land, lauded property

bhū f. floor, pavement

bhū f. a place, spot, piece of ground &c. &c.

bhū f. the base of any geometrical figure

bhū f. object, matter (see «vivādasaṁvāda-bhū»)

bhū f. a term for the letter «l»

bhū f. a sacrificial fire

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

bhū I 1 P. (rarely A.) (bhavati, babhūva, abhūt, bhaviṣyati, bhavituṁ,

bhūta)

(1) To be, become; kathamevaṁ bhavennāma; asyāḥ kimabhavat Māl

9. 29 ‘what has become her fate,’ ‘what has become of her’; U. 3. 27;

yadbhāvi tadbhavatu U. 3 ‘come what may’; so duḥkhito bhavati, hṛṣṭo

bhavati &c.

(2) To be born or produced; yadapatyaṁ bhavedasyāṁ Ms. 9. 127;

bhāgyakrameṇa hi dhanāni bhavaṁti yāṁti Mk. 1. 13.

(3) To spring or proceed from, arise; krodhādbhavati saṁmohaḥ Bg.

2. 63, 14. 17.

(4) To happen, take place, occur; nātatāyivadhe doṣo haṁturbhavati

kaścana Ms. 8. 381; yadi saṁśayo bhavet &c.

(5) To live, exist; abhūdabhūtapūrvaḥ … rājā ciṁtāmaṇirnāma Vās.;

abhūnnṛpo vibudhasakhaḥ paraṁtapaḥ Bk. 1. 1.

(6) To be alive or living, breathe; tvamidānīṁ na bhaviṣyasi S. 6; āḥ

cārudattahataka ayaṁ na bhavasi Mk. 4; durātman prahara nanvayaṁ na

bhavasi Mal. 5 (‘thou art a dead man’, thou shalt breathe no longer); Bg.

11. 32.

(7) To remain or be in any state or condition, fare; bhavān sthale

kathaṁ bhaviṣyati Pt. 2.

(8) To stay, abide; remain, U. 3. 37.

(9) To serve, do; idaṁ pādodakaṁ bhaviṣyati S. 1. (10) To be possible

(usually with a future tense in this sense); bhavati bhavān yājayiṣyati Sk.

(11) To lead or tend to, conduce to, bring about (with dat.); vātāya

kapilā vidyut … pītā bhavati sasyāya durbhikṣāya sitā bhavet Mbh.;

sukhāya tajjanmadinaṁ babhūva Ku. 1. 23; saṁsmṛtirbhava

bhavatyabhavāya Ki. 18. 27; na tasyā rucaye babhūva R. 6. 44.

(12) To be on the side of, assist; devā arjunato’bhavan

(13) To belong or pertain to (often expressed by ‘have’); tasya ha

śataṁ jāyā babhūvuḥ Ait. Br.; Ms. 6. 39.

(14) To be engaged in, be occupied (with loc.); caraṇakṣālane kṛṣṇo

brāhmaṇānāṁ svayaṁ hyabhūt Mb.

(15) To conduct oneself, behave.

(16) Ved. To be prosperous, succeed. Used with a preceding noun or

adjective bhū serves to form verbs in the sense of ‘becoming what it

previously is not’ or ‘becoming’ in general; śvetībhū to become white;

kṛṣṇībhū to become black; payodharībhūta ‘becoming or serving the

purpose of teats’; so kṣapaṇībhū to be or become a mendicant;

praṇidhībhū to act the spy; ārdrībhū to melt; bhasmībhū to be reduced to

ashes; viṣayībhū to form the subject of; so ekamatībhū; taruṇībhū &c. &c.

Note—The senses of bhū may be variously modified according to the

adverbs with which it is connected; e. g. punarbhū to marry again; a

virbhū to appear, arise, to be evident or clear; see āvis; tirobhū to

disappear; prādurbhū to arise, be visible, appear; agrebhū to be in front,

take the lead; aṁtarbhū to be absorbed or included;

ojasyaṁtarbhavaṁtyanye K. P. 8; doṣābhū to grow evening or dusk-time;

anyathā bhū to be otherwise, be changed; na me vacanamanyathā

bhavitumarhati S. 4; puro bhū to come forward, stand forth; mithyā bhū

to turn out false; vṛthā bhū to become useless &c. &c.). —Caus.

(bhāvayati-te)

(1) To cause to be or become, call into existence, call into being.

(2) To cause, produce, effect.

(3) To manifest, display, exhibit.

(4) To foster, cherish, support, preserve, enliven; punaḥ sṛjati varṣāṇi

bhagavān bhāvayanprajāḥ Mb.; devān bhāvayatānena te devā

bhāvayaṁtu vaḥ . parasparaṁ bhāvayaṁtaḥ śreyaḥ paramavāpsyatha Bg.

3. 11; Bk. 16. 27.

(5) To think or reflect, consider, fancy, imagine.

(6) To look upon, consider or regard as; arthamanarthaṁ bhāvaya

nityaṁ Moha M. 2.

(7) To prove, substantiate, establish; Y. 2. 11.

(8) To purify.

(9) To get, obtain. (10) To mingle or mix.

(11) To change or transform into.

(12) To soak, steep.

(13) To devote or addict oneself to.

(14) To convince.

(15) To perfume, scent. —Desid. (bubhūṣati) To wish to be or become

&c. —II. 1 U. (bhavati-te) To get, obtain. —III. 10 A. (bhāvayate) To

obtain, gain. —IV. 1 U. (bhāvayati-te)

(1) To think, reflect.

(2) To mix, mingle.

(3) To be purified (connected with caus. of bhū q. v. above).

bhū a. (At the end of comp.) Being, existing, becoming, springing from,

arising or produced from, &c; cittabhū, ātmabhū, kamalabhū, manobhū

&c. —m.

(1) An epithet of Viṣṇu.

(2) The sacrificial fire.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

bhū 1 bhavati DHĀTUP. 1, 1. P. 2, 4, 52. VOP. 9, 23. bhavatāt P. 7, 1, 35,

Sch.; babhūva, babhūtha ved. (P. 7, 2, 64) und babhūvitha, babhūvima

(BHĀG. P. 1, 11, 7), babhūva 2. pl., babhūyāt, babhūvaṁs, babhūvuṣīḥ

abhūvam, abhūvan (P. 2, 4, 77. 6, 4, 88. 7, 3, 88). abhūt, bhūm, bhūt,

bhūma, bhūta, bhuvas, bhuvat, bhūtu (ṚV. 1, 94, 12). bhūyāmaḥ

bhaviṣyati, bhavitāsmi, bhavitrī (vgl. u. bhavitar); bhūyāsam, bhūyās 3.

sg. (ṚV. 1, 185, 8); inf. bhavitum, bhavitos, bhuve; absol. bhūtvā, bhūtvī,

-bhūya, sadṛgbhavam (ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 3, 1) -bhavim (Sch. zu P. 3, 4, 61.

fgg.). Die unregelmässige Imperativ-Form bodhi sind wir geneigt mit

WESTERGAARD hierher zu stellen, während SĀY. sie bald zu budh, bald

zu bhū zieht; der Gebrauch spricht entschieden für letzteres. ṚV. 1, 24,

11. 31, 9. 44, 6. 76, 4. 4, 17, 17. 22, 10. 6, 46, 4. 7, 32, 11. 25. 75, 2. 96,

2. Zu budh würde gehören uta bodhyāyeḥ 10, 83, 6; während, wenn man

als ursprüngliche Lesart āpe voc. voraussetzen dürfte, mit einer

Construction wie 1, 76, 4. es ebenfalls hier seine Stelle fände. med.:

bhave (TAITT. ĀR. 10, 17), bhavate (MUṆḌ. UP. 3, 1, 4. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2,

14. MBH. 13, 2947), bhavāmahe (HARIV. 5928), bhavasva (MBH. 3, 1581.

14413. fg. 4, 203. 8, 1665. HARIV. 5786. R. 2, 90, 12 ed. Bomb. bhaveti

ha. 3, 30, 14), bhavethās (MBH. 4, 1751. 13, 2881. N. 1, 27), bhaveta

(MBH. 13, 28. 14, 1295), bhaviṣye (MBH. 4, 411). bhaviṣyate (MBH. 3,

10619), bhaviṣyete (R. 1, 24, 17), bhaviṣyadhvam (MBH. 3, 14394. R. 1,

29, 25); bhūyiṣṭhās BHĀG. P. 5, 18, 8 wird vom Scholiasten durch bhūyās

erklärt. pass. und impers. babhūve und bubhūve VOP. 8, 33. 24, 6.

bhāvitā und bhavitā ebend. 1) «werden, entstehen, geschehen;

stattfinden, dasein, sich befinden, sein»: bhūta devā vṛtratūryeṣu

śaṁbhuvaḥ ṚV. 1, 106. 2. iṣāṁ no netā bhavatādanu dyūn 3, 23, 2.

yaddūre sannihābhavaḥ 9, 2. ūrdhvo bhava 4, 4, 5. bhuvatte kutsaḥ

sakhya 16, 10. svena bhāmena taviṣo babhūvān 1, 165, 8.

yathāhānyanupūrva bhavanti 10, 18, 5. tamū akṛṇvaṁstredhā bhuve kam

88, 10. indro vā idamabhūdyadvayam TS. 6, 4, 6, 2. pratibuddhā abhūtana

AV. 4, 37, 3. 5, 5, 7. 7, 6, 1. VS. 2, 7. 3, 27. rājā bhavitum ŚAT. BR. 5, 1,

1, 13. īśvaro ha śreyānbhavitoḥ 9, 5, 2, 3. evaṁ trīṇi ṣaṣṭiśatāni bhavanti

ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 4, 15, 30. TBR. 1, 3. 10, 9. anuvakṣyanbhavati «ist im Begriff»

ŚAT. BR. 3, 9, 3, 7. 12, 4, 2, 3. AIT. BR. 7, 20. KAUŚ. 68. GOBH. 2, 8, 9.

— bhaviṣyatyamṛtaṁ tatra mathyamāne mahodadhau MBH. 1, 1110.

bhāgyakrameṇa hi dhanāni bhavānti yānti Spr. 3129. budbudā iva toyeṣu

bhavanti na bhavanti ca «entstehen und vergehen» 3075. vāgabhūttatra

mānuṣī so v. a. «erhob sich» DAŚ. 1. 24. krodhādbhavati maṁmohaḥ

BHAG. 2. 63. 14, 17. SĀṁKHYAK. 45. yadapatyaṁ bhavedasyām M. 9,

127. MBH. 1, 3802. tadbhaviṣyati «das wird geschehen» 13, 2809. 2812.

nākālamṛtyurbhavatīha loke R. 5, 28, 3. 1, 55, 18. pañcikā nāma

dyūtaviśeṣaḥ pañcābhiḥ kapardaiḥ bhavati Sch. zu P. 2, 1, 10. yadi

tanmama prāṇairbhavati «zu Stande kommt, geschieht» PAÑCAT. 186, 22.

kālaviprakarṣastvatra bhavati «findet statt» AV. PRĀT. 2, 39.

aharaharbhūyānmahānutsavaḥ Spr. 3167. babhūvurhi puroḍāśā

bhakṣyāṇāṁ mṛgapakṣiṇām. purāṇeṣvapi yajñeṣu «es gab» M. 5, 23.

tatrāśramapadaṁ kaṇḍorbabhūva «befand sich» BRAHMA-P. in LA. (II)

49, 11. abhūnnṛpo vibudhasakhaḥ — daśaratha ityudāhṛtaḥ «es war ein Mal

ein König» BHAṬṬ. 1, 1. KATHĀS. 14, 37. bhavati bhoktum «es ist Etwas

da zum Essen» Sch. zu P. 3, 4, 65. jagāma yatra sā bālā vrāhmaṇena

sahābhavat «wo sie sich befand» N. 16, 31. tāvattvayi bhaviṣyāmi 5, 31.

pathi bhava «bleibe auf dem Wege» MEGH. 29.

tadaṇḍamabhavaddhaimam «das wurde zu einem goldenen Ei» M. 1, 9.

pramudito ‘bhavat R. 1, 9, 39. ŚĀK. 31, 3. PRAB. 64, 10. tasya kopāgninā

dagdhā bhaviṣyanti nṛpātmajāḥ «werden verbrannt werden» R. 1, 41, 13.

PRAB. 37, 6. (dīṣāḥ) hatatviṣo babhūvuḥ RAGH. 3, 15. 15, 47. MEGH. 3.

50. abhūtsaṁpāditasvāduphalo me manorathaḥ ŚĀK. 108, 15. Spr. 3178.

yauvanavatī babhūva HIT. 28, 4. VET. in LA. (II) 19, 2. aṇumātriko bhūtvā

M. 1, 56. garbho bhūtvā 9, 8. prāñjalirbhūtvā N. 5, 16. 7, 6. 9, 19. 14, 4.

INDR. 1, 10. R. 1, 2, 27. 63, 24. 65, 5. ŚĀK. 12, 20. VET. in LA. (II) 14,

17. pṛṣṭhato bhūtvā, -bhūya und -bhāvaṁ tiṣṭhati P. 3, 4, 61. tūṣṇīṁ

bhūtvā, -bhūya und -bhāvaṁ tiṣṭhati 63. nānā (vinā, dvidhā, dvaidhaṁ u.

s. w.) bhūtvā, -bhūya und bhāvam 62. impers.: kālāntareṇa yaireva

bhūmipālairbhaviṣyate «die Fürsten werden werden» RĀJA-TAR. 5, 418.

tirobhūyate st. tirobhavati Schol. zu KAP. 1, 121. kuśūladhānyako vā syāt

— tryahaihiko vāpi bhavet «sein» M. 4, 7. agnipakvāśano vā syāt —

aśmakuṭṭo bhavedvāpi 6, 17. 8, 298. 1, 49. 2, 128. 153.

evamikṣvākunāthena pālitā sābhavatpurī R. 1, 6, 19. 2, 23, 34. riktaḥ

sarvo hi bhavati laghuḥ MEGH. 20. 91. 101. 106. 111. tataḥ

svāmikumārasya pādamūlaṁ gato ‘bhavat KATHĀS. 2, 60. 79.

raktanetrastriśikhāṁ bhṛkuṭīṁ dadhānaḥ sṛkkaṇī parilelihaṁstvāṁ dṛṣṭvā

yadi bhaviṣyati PAÑCAT. 85, 4. VET. in LA. (II) 17, 1. 22, 22. tatkṣaṇācca

sa rājābhūdvipro bhūtvā «der er früher Brahmane gewesen war» VID.

335. kathaṁ buddhvā bhaviṣyati «wie wird ihr sein, wenn sie erwacht?»

N. 10, 22. 11, 11. fg. 12, 65. BRĀHMAṆ. 2, 9. nābhijānāmi bhavedevaṁ

na veti «ob es sich so verhält oder nicht» N. 20, 9. śreyastvaṁ kveti

cedbhavet so v. a. «wenn die Frage aufgeworfen werden sollte» M. 10,

66. 82. 12, 108. Folgende Verbindungen und Formen führen wir der

besseren Uebersicht wegen besonders auf: a) mit na «zu Nichte werden,

aufhören zu sein, sterben»: yasya bāhuvalaṁ prāpya na

bhavantyasuhṛdgaṇāḥ MBH. 1, 2824. tena jīvasi rājarṣe na

bhavethāstvamanyathā 13, 2881. ṛte ‘pi tvāṁ na bhaviṣyanti sarve BHAG.

11, 32. N. 21, 10. MBH. 1, 2781. 3, 16013. 13, 1900. R. 1, 55, 27. 3, 73,

17. 6, 11, 5. Spr. 3905. ŚĀK. 94, 2. KATHĀS. 49, 63. PAÑCAT. 164, 13.

kurūṇāmanayāccāpi pṛthivī na bhaviṣyati «wird zu Grunde gehen» MBH. 1,

1971. śrutvemāṁ tu kathāṁ rājanna bhavantīha mānavāḥ «erscheinen

nicht wieder hier auf Erden, werden nicht wiedergeboren» 3, 13429. — b)

mit gen. (selten dat. loc.) der Person: «Jmd zu Theil werden, Jmd treffen,

esse alicui» ṚV. 10, 40, 3. tasya śataṁ jāyā babhūvuḥ AIT. BR. 7, 13.

idamu no bhaviṣyati TBR. 1, 1, 6, 1. bahu me bhūyāt ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 2, 10, 2.

4, 11, 3. tasya tejomayā lokā bhavanti M. 6, 39. plavagā vṛścikā daṁśāḥ —

kīṭāśca mā bhūvangahane so v. a. «mögest du nicht auf Affen» u. s. w.

«stossen» R. 2, 25, 16. dharmaṣaḍbhāgo rājño bhavati rakṣataḥ M. 8,

304. 9, 155. Spr. 1784. PAÑCAT. 7, 8. ṛṣyaśṛṅga iti khyātastasya putro

bhaviṣyati R. 1, 8, 7. VID. 268. garbho ‘bhavadbhūdhararājapatnyāḥ

KUMĀRAS. 1, 19. kruddhādvāpi prasannādvā kiṁ me tvatto bhaviṣyati

MBH. 2, 1579. tasya bhūtasya no duḥkhādduḥkhamabhyadhikaṁ bhavet

N. 11, 16. vaitṛṣṇyaṁ yāsu (apsu) gorbhavet M. 5, 128. yathā śreyo hi no

bhavet N. 12, 90. R. 2, 25, 30. VID. 184. yo dāturbhavatyūrdhvaṁ

phalodayaḥ M. 3, 169. 178. bhūtānāṁ yadbhūyāsurvibhūtayaḥ BHĀG. P. 6,

4, 44. śūdraviṭkṣatraviprāṇāṁ yatrartoktau bhavedvadhaḥ M. 8, 104.

nātatāyivadhe doṣo bhavati hantuḥ kaśca na 351. 10, 103. N. 4, 19.

yasyehānuśayo bhavet M. 8, 222. 228. tasya devatānāmabhūdbhayam R.

1, 63, 16. tvadartha evābhūccharvājñānugrahaḥ sa me VID. 272.

kṣutpipāse na te rāma bhaviṣyete R. 1, 24, 17. yasyāstu na bhavedbhrātā

«die keinen Bruder hat» M. 3, 11. KATHĀS. 14, 37. nahīdṛśaṁ tāpasānāṁ

rūpaṁ bhavati karhicit R. 1, 9, 45. VID. 109. na putro na pitā tatra

bhavedyatra striyāḥ patiḥ Spr. 4315. tasya prasaṅgo ‘bhūddevane N. 13,

32. yathā hyekena cakreṇa rathasya na gatirbhavet Spr. 2330. VID. 111.

118. Spr. 1875. iti me matirbhavati SĀṁKHYAK. 61. mit dat.: ahānyasmai

sudinā bhavanti ṚV. 7, 11, 2. bhadramebhyo ‘bhūt ŚAT. BR. 4, 6, 9, 19.

mit loc.: pāle tatkilviṣaṁ bhavet M. 8, 235. mit pari und prati und einem

vorangehenden acc.: hariṁ paryabhavallakṣmīrharaṁ prati halāhalam

VOP. 5, 7. — c) mit gen. der Person «auf Jmdes Seite sein, Jmd

beistehen» P. 5, 4, 48. satkṛtāśca kṛtārthāśca mitrāṇāṁ na bhavanti ye

Spr. 5124. st. des gen. auch die adv. Form auf tas P. a. a. O. devā

arjunato oder arjunasyābhavat Sch. — d) mit dat. der Sache «sein —,

gereichen —, dienen —, verhelfen zu»: sadyo bhuvadvīryāya nodhāḥ ṚV. 1,

61, 14. vṛdhe bhuvadyajyoḥ 4, 23, 2. 5, 5, 4. mā te bhūma parādai 7, 19,

7. abhūdagniḥ samidhe mānuṣāṇām 77, 1. avase 48, 4.

dāturbhavatyanarthāya M. 4, 193. hitāya BRĀHMAṆ. 3, 19. sukhāya

KUMĀRAS. 1, 23. bhavāya BHĀG. P. 1, 11, 7. trailokyasyāpi vināśāya

MBH. 3, 12312. tasyāḥ na sa kṣitīśo rucaye babhūva so v. a. «gefiel ihr

nicht» RAGH. 6, 44. tayā vimuktasya — bhaviṣyasi tvaṁ yadi saṁgamāya

VIKR. 129. Spr. 1841. smṛtā bhavati tāpāya 3320. yathā bījāṅkuraḥ

paripuṣṭaḥ kāle phalāya bhavati «Früchte bringt» 2316. — e) mit loc. der

Sache «sich hingeben, an Etwas gehen, sich beschäftigen mit»: dāne

tapasi satye ca bhava MBH. 5, 205. caraṇakṣālane kṛṣṇo brāhmaṇānāṁ

svayaṁ hyabhūt 2, 1295. Spr. 2871. ślāghye kṛtye narasya bhaviṣyataḥ

1875. — f) bei einer innigeren Verbindung von bhū «werden» mit seinem

Prädicate erscheint dieses nicht im Nominativ, sondern in einer durch alle

Geschlechter und Zahlen unveränderlich bleibenden Form auf ī oder ūḥ z.

B. śuklībhavati (von śukla), agnī- (von agni), arū- (von arus). uccakṣū-

(von uccakṣus) P. 5, 4, 50. fgg. VOP. 7, 81. fgg. — g) bhavati mit einem

folgenden fut. «es kann geschehen, dass» P. 3, 3, 146. bhavati

tatrabhavānvṛṣalaṁ yājayiṣyati Sch. — h) imperat. bhavatu so v. a. «gut,

schon gut, genug, wozu die vielen Worte? wozu das viele Nachdenken?

die Sache ist ja klar»; = astu, kim H. 1528. ŚĀK. 7, 17. 9, 18. 40. 9. 64. 8.

79, 6. 81, 16. kathamidānīmātmānaṁ nivedayāmi. kathaṁ vātmāpahāraṁ

karomi. bhavatu. evaṁ tāvadenāṁ vakṣye 13, 22. 8, 22. v. l. 12, 12. 18,

10. 30, 13. 33, 3. 101, 20, v. l. VIKR. 2, 2. PRAB. 21. 14. 50, 7. 53, 3. HIT.

17, 16. 35, 8. HIT. ed. JOHNS. 1214. — i) babhūva in Verbindung mit dem

acc. eines nom. act. auf ā bildet wie āsa und cakāra periphrastische

Perfecta, P. 3, 1. 40, Sch. VOP. 8, 56. — k) partic. praes. bhavant und

praet. bhūta s. bes. — l) partic. fut. bhaviṣyant «zukünftig»; n. «das

Zukünftige, Zukunft» AV. 4, 11. 2. 10, 7, 9. 11, 7. 14. 13, 3, 7. ŚAT. BR. 2,

3, 1, 24. 10, 4, 1, 9. bhaviṣyadbhūyo bhūtāt KĀṬH. 19, 10. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2,

4, 14. TS. 5, 1, 9, 2. KAUṢ. UP. 1. 5. P. 3, 3, 3. VOP. 25, 1. KATHĀS. 1,

24. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 337. 351. SĀH. D. 29, 16. bhaviṣyantī f. «das

erste Futurum» bei den östlichen Grammatikern P. 3, 3, 15, Vārtt. Nach

NAIGH. 1, 12 das n. angeblich = udaka «Wasser.» — 2) prägnant «etwas

Rechtes werden» oder «sein, Etwas zu bedeuten haben, gedeihen»:

sanema mitrāvaruṇā sananto bhavema dyāvāpṛthivī bhavantaḥ ṚV. 7, 52,

1. yo vai bhavati yaḥ śreṣṭhatāmaśnute AIT. BR. 1, 13. 3, 21. bhavati vai

sa yo ‘syaitadevaṁ nāma veda 33. tato vai devā abhavanparāsurā

bhavatyātmanā parāsya bhrātṛvyo bhavati 39 (ŚAT. BR. 14, 4, 1, 8). 2,

15. TS. 2, 4, 3, 3. 5, 1, 2, 3. ŚAT. BR. 1, 3, 4, 16. 9, 5, 1, 16. 13, 3, 4, 2.

bhūyāma putraiḥ paśubhiḥ ṢAḌV. BR. 1, 6. yattu vāṇijake dattaṁ neha

nāmutra tadbhavet so v. a. «Lohn bringen» M. 3, 181. — 3) mit acc. «in

Etwas hineinkommen, gerathen in, gelangen zu» (act. med. DHĀTUP. 34,

37. VOP. 8, 17). bālbajena nidānena kāṁsyaṁ bhavatu dohanam MBH.

13, 4587. sa rāṣṭraṁ nābhavat TBR. 1, 7, 7, 4. yo vai bhavati yaḥ

śreṣṭhatāmaśnute sa kilbiṣaṁ bhavati «wer Etwas ist und obenan steht,

der geräth» (leicht) «in Verfehlung» AIT. BR. 1, 13. TS. 2, 4, 3, 1. sa idaṁ

bhaviṣyati «der wird es dazu bringen» so v. a. «der wird Glück haben» 6, 1,

3, 1. 6. 2, 7, 1; womit die andere Verbindung mit kva (vgl. u. d. W.) zu

vergleichen ist, z. B. kvāha tatastadbhavati «wohin führt» oder «geräth

das?» so v. a. «das ist vergeblich» TBR. 2, 1, 3, 12. Hierher zieht

WESTERGAARD MBH. 1, 5366: pārvatenābhavadgirim, die neuere Ausg.

liest aber pārvatenāsṛjadgirīn. — Vgl. bhava, bhavaka, bhavana,

bhavanīya, bhavant fgg., bhavitar, bhavitavya, bhavitra, bhaviṣya, bhavya,

bhāva, bhāvuka, bhāvya.

caus. bhāvayati (selten med.), aor. abībhavat P. 7, 4, 80, Sch. 1) «in’s

Dasein bringen, in’s Leben rufen, erzeugen, hervorbringen, bewirken,

schaffen»: bhāvitāḥ pūrvajātīṣu karmabhiśca (so ist zu lesen)

śubhāśubhaiḥ VĀYUP. bei MUIR, ST. I, 30, N. 54. prajāsargamimaṁ

punaḥ. mithunavyavāyadharmiṇyāṁ bhūriśo bhāvayiṣyasi BHĀG. P. 6, 4,

52. tasyām — atmajān — daśa bhāvayāṁ babhūva kanyāṁ ca 5, 1, 24.

(yaḥ) sūryavaṁśaṁ naṣṭaṁ bhāvayitā punaḥ 9, 12, 6.

nānābhinayasaṁbandhānbhāvayanti rasānyataḥ SĀH. D. 208.

upāsanenātmaviṣayaṁ viśiṣṭaṁ vijñānāntaraṁ bhāvayet ŚAṁK. zu BṚH.

ĀR. UP. S. 177. mit tiras «verschwinden machen, vertreiben»:

tasyāvalepanaṁ jñātvā kruddhastu bhagavānharaḥ. tirobhāvayituṁ

buddhiṁ cakre R. 1, 44, 9. bhāvita und bhāvitaka «das Product einer

Multiplication» COLEBR. Alg. 187. 343. auch «involving a product of

unknown quantities» 187. — 2) «fovere, Jmd hegen, pflegen, fördern,

beleben, erfrischen» AIT. UP. 4, 2. 3. bhavayañchivamātmanā MBH. 13,

1364. PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 25. bhagavāṁllokabhāvitaḥ MĀRK. P. 108, 21.

ṛtuviracitabhāgaistvaṁ surānbhāvayālam ad ŚĀK. 193. yajñabhāvitāḥ

(devāḥ) Spr. 3756. devānbhāvayatānena (yajñena) te devā bhāvayantu

vaḥ. parasparaṁ bhāvayantaḥ śreyaḥ paramavāpsyatha.. BHAG. 3, 11. tā

(prajāḥ) bhāvitā bhāvayanti havyakavyairdivaukasaḥ MBH. 3, 8763. 13,

4712. punaḥ sṛjati varṣāṇi bhagavānbhāvayanprajāḥ 3, 11878.

parasparasya suhṛdo bhāvayantaḥ parasparam 14, 710. mitho nighnanti

bhūtāni bhāvayanti ca yanmithaḥ BHĀG. P. 1, 15, 24. tasyāmadhatta

retastāṁ bhāvayannātmanā 3, 23, 47. ātman (loc.) bhāvayase tāni

(bhūtāni) 2, 5, 5. bhāvaya bhāvito mām MBH. 1, 3243.

daurhṛdairbhāvitasya 5, 751. īśvaraṁ saṁprapadyante dvijā

bhāvitabhāvanāḥ «die selbst gefördert werden und Andere fördern» 13,

1359. (suraśreṣṭhāḥ) bhāvayanto bhuvaṁ devīm HARIV. 2973. mahānadī

dvāravatīm — praviṣṭā — bhāvayantī samantataḥ 8958. (sūryaḥ) paryeti

bhuvanānyeṣa bhāvayanbhūtabhāvanaḥ SŪRYAS. 12, 16. MBH. 1, 8419. 3,

11891. sarve te munayaḥ kṣattarlokānsargairabhāvayan BHĀG. P. 4, 1,

45. 1, 2, 34. arthena saṁbhṛtā rājñā na bhāviṣyāmahe (pass.) vayam

vielleicht so v. a. «sich schonen» BHAṬṬ. 16, 27. tena pārthivamukhyena

bhāvitam (puram) «gehegt, zur Blüthe gebracht» MBH. 1, 6630.

pṛthubhāvitā (= vaśīkṛtā Schol.) bhūḥ BHĀG. P. 4, 18, 13. viṣayānna

bhāvayet «huldigen, sich hingeben» MBH. 12, 7165. — 3) «an den Tag

legen, äussern, zeigen»: praṇayam MBH. 4, 1202. paramāṁ maitrīm KĀM.

NĪTIS. 3, 22. nirmanaskatām 1, 35. śayīya bhāvitaviṣavegavikriyaḥ

DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 187, 6. 11. — 4) «umwandeln, umformen»: yaṁ

yaṁ vāpi smaranbhāvaṁ tyajatyante kalevaram. taṁ tamevaiti kaunteya

tadbhāvabhāvitaḥ.. BHAG. 8, 6. tadbhāvabhāvite citte vallabhasya

kathādiṣu SĀH. D. 141. ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 50. 55. 307. MĀRK. P.

58, 56. — 5) «läutern» (śuddhau DHĀTUP. 33, 73): yogairhemeva

durvarṇaṁ bhāvayiṣyanti sādhavaḥ. nirvairādibhirātmānam BHĀG. P. 3,

14, 45. bhāvayaṁstapasātmānam Spr. 4410. v.l. tapasā bhāvitaḥ sadā

MBH.1,1729. 4585. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 55,a,24. bhāvitabuddhi «der seinen

Verstand geläutert —, gebildet hat» SĀH. D. 204. bhāvitātman (=

śodhitacitta Schol. zu MBH., = cintitātman Schol. zu RAGH). «dessen

Geist geläutert ist» oder «der seine Gedanken auf den Geist gerichtet

hat», SUND. 2, 14. MBH. 1, 9. 6630. 13, 1360. R. 1, 2, 44. 24, 20. RAGH.

1, 74. Spr. 560. RĀJA-TAR. 5, 125; vgl. 2. bhūtātman. trīnpatho

bhāvayantī (gaṅgā) R. 1, 44, 48. yathā sukhagamaḥ panthā

bhavettvadraśmibhāvitaḥ «erleuchtet» (vielleicht bhāsitaḥ zu lesen) MBH.

13, 4640. — 6) med. «erlangen» (prāptau) DHĀTUP. 34, 37. act:

agnihotranāmakahomena svargaṁ bhāvayet Schol. zu JAIM. 1, 25.

bhāvita = prāpta, labdha «erlangt» AK. 3, 2, 54. H. 1490. an. 3, 284. fg.

MED. t. 140. — 7) «dem Geiste vergegenwärtigen, sich Etwas denken,

vorstellen; erkennen» (cintāyām DHĀTUP. 33, 73): nāsti

buddhirayuktasya na cāyuktasya bhāvanā. na cābhāvayataḥ śāntiḥ BHAG.

2, 66. bhāvayannātmanātmānam Spr. 4410. apūrvaṁ bhāvayetpātraṁ

yaccāpi syācciroṣitam so v. a. «halten für» MBH. 13, 2187.

arthamanarthaṁ bhāvaya nityam Spr. 3589. 3099. KATHĀS. 27, 33.

ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 3, 13, 43. KĀM. NĪTIS. 19, 28 (wo wohl aśvapuruṣān zu

lesen ist). BHĀG. P. 5, 7, 6 (med.). 8, 17, 19. PRAB. 91, 12. WEBER,

RĀMAT. UP. 324. svabhāvabhāvena hi bhāvitāvubhau yathekṣunimbau

svarasena tau tathā «erkannt an» Spr. 1397. tvaṁ tathyaṁ

bhāvitumarhasi R. 4, 26, 23. — 8) «Jmd überführen»: nihnave bhāvitaḥ

YĀJÑ. 2, 11. MBH. 5. 1697 (= vardhita Schol.). — 9) «Etwas constatiren,

feststellen»: (ṛṇam) sākṣibhāvitam YĀJÑ. 2, 50. ye bhāvā mayi bhāvitāḥ

«festgestellt, bestimmt» Spr. 3682. — 10) «vermengen; sättigen,

einweichen» (avakalkane, miśraṇe DHĀTUP. 33, 73):

rasāngandhānbhāvayanneti devaḥ KAUŚ. 135. evaṁ saptarātraṁ

bhāvayecchoṣayecca SUŚR. 2, 72, 10. mūtrabhāvita 12, 8. 31, 13.

ambhasi 67, 10. 155, 1. 500, 8. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 2, 1, 23. 3, 8, 17. vicūrṇya

bhāvayetsamyak trivelaṁ triphalārasaiḥ 13, 88. 94. bhāvita = vāsita

«parfümirt» AK. 2, 6, 3, 35. 9, 46. H. 414. an. 3, 284. fg. MED. t. 140. —

11) bhāvita «ganz von Etwas erfüllt, beschäftigt mit»: ye cainaṁ

pratipadyante bhaktiyogena bhāvitāḥ MBH. 13, 1076.

strīratnametattrailokye sāraṁ no yadi vai bhavet. kṛtakṛtyāstataḥ sarva iti

no bhāvitaṁ manaḥ.. MĀRK. P. 18, 43.

putrādibhrātṛputrādisvapārakyādibhāvitaiḥ. ākṛṣyamāṇaṁ

karaṇairduḥkhārtam 44, 31. ramaya mayā saha

madanamanorathabhāvitayā GĪT. 2. 11. śāstrajanitajñānakarmabhāvitāḥ

(devāḥ) ŚAṁK. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 64. «gerichtet auf»: yadīśvare

bhagavati karma vrahmaṇi bhāvitam (= samarpitam Schol.) BHĀG. P. 1,

5, 32. — bhāvita ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 22 fehlerhaft für bhāmita; vgl. ṚV. 1,

114, 8. Vgl. bhāvaka, bhāvana, bhāvanīya, bhāvayitar fgg.

desid. bubhūṣati (auch med.) Schol. zu P. 7, 2, 12. 4, 73. VOP. 19, 5.

1) «werden —, sein wollen» AIT. BR. 2, 20. yasmāduttaro bubhūṣati

tasmāduttaro bhavati 4, 18. ŚAT. BR. 3, 1, 2, 16. 10, 3, 5, 9. 11, 2, 3, 5.

14, 4, 1, 20. 2, 2. 9, 2, 1. ṢAḌV. BR. 1, 5. KAUṢ. UP. 2, 4.

nāvrāhmaṇastāta ciraṁ bubhūṣedicchannimaṁ lokamamuṁ ca jetum

«wird nicht lange ohne Brahmanen sein wollen» (= aiśvaryamicchet

Schol.) MBH. 3, 974. saṁvatsaramimaṁ tātāstathāśīlā bubhūpata (Lesart

der ed. Bomb.; = aiśvaryaṁ prāptumicchata Schol.) «bestrebet euch — zu

sein» 4, 133. tasmātkṣipraṁ bubhūṣadhvam (= tānprāptumicchata Schol.)

so v. a. «bestrebt euch rasch bei der Hand zu sein» 889. — 2) «Etwas

werden wollen, emporkommen wollen, auf seine Wohlfahrt bedacht sein»

TBR. 2, 1, 8, 1. TS. 3, 2, 3, 3. ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 1. ātmanā bubhūṣantaḥ 10.

ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 14. KĀṬH. 34, 9. PAÑCAV. BR. 20, 2, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 12, 5,

13. 23, 1, 21. MBH. 1, 3327. nāvajñeyo ripustāta prākṛto ‘pi bubhūṣatā 4,

960. 13, 179. 6619. — 3) «Jmd» (acc.) «haben wollen»:

yeyamasmānapāhāya yavīyāṁsaṁ bubhūṣati (= bhūpayitumicchati

Schol.) HARIV. 570. atha vā yadi kanyeyaṁ na ca kaṁcidvubhūṣati MBH.

1, 7068. ma māmabhigataṁ premṇā yājyatve na bubhūṣati 14, 168. so v.

a. «Jmd gern haben, Jmd wohl wollen»: daridraṁ yo bubhūṣate (=

pālayitumicchati Schol.) 12, 5230. 1, 7969. guruṁ cābhigataṁ premṇā

guruvanna bubhūṣate (3. pl.) «freundlich empfangen» 13, 6702. yaḥ

kalyāṇaguṇān jñātīnpradveṣānno bubhūṣati (Lesart der ed. Bomb.) 12,

3514. — 4) «Etwas» (acc.) «haben wollen, sich um Etwas bemühen,

Etwas sich angelegen sein lassen, gern haben, achten»: bubhūṣedbalam

MBH. 12, 4837. dharmārthayuktaṁ tu mahīpatitvaṁ grāme ‘pi

kasmiṁścidayaṁ bubhūṣet 5, 15. buddhiṁ paramāṁ bubhūṣan (der

Schol. lässt bu- pa- vom vorangehenden papraccha abhängen und erklärt

bubhūṣan durch paraṁ brahma bhavitumicchan) 1577. tvāṁ tu (so die

ed. Bomb.) śocāmi yo labdhvā brāhmaṇyaṁ na bubhūṣate (= prāpnoṣi

Schol.) «der du nach Erlangung der Brahmanenwürde sie nicht achten

wirst» 13, 1926. na tiṣṭhati sma sanmārge na ca dharmaṁ (so die ed.

Bomb.) bubhūṣati (= prāptumicchati Schol.) 4, 678. deśācārānsamayān

jātidharmānbubhūṣate (= aiśvaryaṁ prāptumicchati Schol.) yaḥ sa

parāvarajñaḥ «achten, in Ehren halten» 5, 1084. — 5) «sich zu rächen

gedenken» BHĀG. P. 4, 6, 4. — Vgl. bubhūṣaka fgg.

desid. vom caus. bibhāvayiṣati P. 7, 4, 80, Sch. VOP. 19, 14.

intens. bobhūyate P. 7, 4, 73, Sch. bobhavīti, bobhoti 65, Sch. VOP. 20,

17. bobhūtu ved. P. 7, 4, 65. bobhavati P. 7, 3, 88, Vārtt. 1) «häufig sein,

zu sein pflegen» BHĀG. P. 5, 3, 8. BHAṬṬ. 18, 41. — 2) «sich verwandeln

in» (acc.): rūpaṁ rūpaṁ maghavā bobhavīti ṚV. 3, 53, 8. uta nagnā

bobhuvatī svapnayā sacase janam AV. 5, 7, 8. — 3) tira ivaitena bobhuvat

«das halte er geheim, verberge er» ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 3, 16.

ati 1) «in hohem Grade werden, — entstehen»: śabdaśca ghoro

‘tibabhūva MBH. 8, 4541. — 2) «mehr sein als, übertreffen»; mit acc.:

indro ‘tyanyā devatā abhavat PAÑCAV. BR. 22, 8, 2. 25, 1, 9.

yairanyānbhavitāsmyati MBH. 3, 10731. ati cānyānbhaviṣyāvaḥ (so die ed.

Bomb.) 10734. pitṝndaśa tu mātaikā sarvāṁ vā pṛthivīmapi.

gurutvenātibhavati (abhibhavati Spr. 1120. MBH. 13, 5127) 12, 4006.

med.: bhave bhavenātibhave TAITT. ĀR. 10, 17. — 3) «überwältigen»:

dyaurna bhātyatibhūtārkā ghoreṇa tamasā vṛtā so v. a. «verfinstert (von»

Rāhu «überwältigt)» HARIV. 2397; die neuere Ausg. richtiger

abhibhūtārkā. — desid. «mehr sein wollen als» ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 3. 11, 6.

vyati, -bhaviṣīṣṭa P. 7. 3, 88. Sch. med. «mit Jmd» (acc.) «um den

Vorrang streiten»: vyatibhavate ‘rkaminduḥ VOP. 23. 55.

anu 1) «umfassen, einschliessen»: yathā vai dve vāmalake dve vā kole

dvau vākṣau, muṣṭiranubhavatyevaṁ vācaṁ ca nāma ca mano ‘nubhavati

CHĀND. UP. 7, 3, 1. — 2) «erreichen, gleichkommen»: na te mahitvamanu

bhūdadha dyauḥ ṚV. 3, 32, 11. 1, 52, 11. ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 3, 3. «so lange

bestehen wie» (acc.) oder «erfüllen»: atho va uśatī

kīrtirlokānanubhaviṣyati BHĀG. P. 4, 30, 11; vgl. eṣā te bhāsvatī

kīrtirlokānabhibhaviṣyati MBH. 3, 10592. — 3) «Jmd zur Hand gehen,

helfen, dienlich sein» ŚAT. BR. 10, 3, 5, 9. 14, 4, 1, 20. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 15, 5,

2. 9. — 4) «sich Jmd zuwenden»: ubhe yattvā bhavato rodamī anu ṚV. 10,

147, 1. dhāvatāmanu SV. — 5) «empfinden, fühlen, geniessen, an sich

erfahren, erleiden»: anubhūtakiṁcidaṅgasparśa HIT. ed. JOHNS. 1815.

rase sāraścamatkāraḥ sarvatrāpyanubhūyate SĀH. D. 23, 17. karmaṇo

‘nurūpaṁ phalamanubhūya NIR. 14, 7. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 15. RĀJA-

TAR. 4, 186. HIT. 112, 10, v. l. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 10 (?). sukham RAGH. 1,

21. ŚĀK. 148. KATHĀS. 50, 114. PAÑCAT. 49, 4. ed. orn. 58, 19 (wo sa

kāmasukhānyanuvabhūva zu lesen ist). ŚUK. in LA. (II) 33, 16. Einl. in

CAURAP. VOP. 21, 10. suratasaukhyam PAÑCAT. 38, 5. VET. in LA. (II)

10, 4. atraiṣa devaḥ mahimānamanubhavati PRAŚNOP. 4, 5.

suratotsavam KATHĀS. 45, 318. prītim Spr. 2350. KUMĀRAS. 2, 45.

mṛgayārasam VET. in LA. (II) 5, 2. bhogān Spr. 1718 (med.). vittam

3484. 3622. vividhānyannapānāni MBH. 15, 771. svecchayodakādyāhāro

‘nubhūyatām HIT. 38, 13. snānabhojanavilepanāni DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr.

198, 8. śubhraṁ sadma savibhramā yuvatayaḥ śvetātapatrojjvalā

lakṣmīrityanubhūyate sthiramiva Spr. 3003. harmyatalam, madhu, gītam

ṚT. 1, 3. karasādo ‘mbaratyāgastejohāniḥ sarāgatā. vāruṇīsaṅgāvasthā

bhānunāṣyanubhūyate Spr. 600. ārdrākṣatāropaṇamanvabhūtām RAGH.

7, 25. tena sahābhiṣecanam 8, 3. krīḍām «die Freuden des Spieles

empfinden» R. 5, 15, 51. bhātāpitṛsahasrāṇi putradāraśatāti ca.

saṁsāreṣvatubhūtāni «sich erfreuen an» Spr. 4709. P. 5, 2, 10. anubhavati

hi mūrdhnā pādapastīvramuṣṇam Spr. 5360. yātanāḥ M. 12, 17. DAŚAK.

in BENF. Chr. 195, 19. āpadam MBH. 3, 10789. duḥkham 4, 525. ŚĀK. 89,

10. HIT. 48, 2. khedam ŚĀK. 88, 11. kleśam KATHĀS. 43, 208.

viyogamanayā saha 34, 248. kṛcchram MĀLAV. 68, 21. preṣyabhāvam 69,

15. śokam BHAṬṬ. 16, 30. vimānanām RĀJA-TAR. 4, 640. aśṛṇvatā mama

vacastvayedamanubhūyate R. 4, 18, 27. asukhodarkāndoṣān «die Strafe

für Vergehen erleiden» M. 12, 18. BHAṬṬ. 15, 16. — 6) «wahrnehmen,

innewerden, hören, vernehmen, erfahren, kennen lernen»:

kṣīrodavikṣobhamanubhūya Spr. 1449. jhaṁkāramanubhūya SĀH. D. 70,

16. ananubhūtapūrvaka (nardita) HIT. 47, 18. anubhūyatāmayaṁ vīrāḥ

svayaṁvaraḥ so v. a. «erfahret, dass eine Selbstwahl statt finden wird»,

MBH. 3, 2112. anubhūyāsya vivāham 2230. anubhūtaṁ ca yanmayā 13,

3940. R. 3, 4, 4. BHĀG. P. 1, 13, 11. anubhūtavipayāsaṁpramoṣaḥ smṛtiḥ

JOGAS. 1, 11. SĀH. D. 190. H. 1373. NĪLAK. 157. 168. DAŚAK. in BENF.

Chr. 185, 23. vedānnānubhavasi CHĀND. UP. 6, 7, 3. «Jmd kennen lernen,

erproben»: na tvaṁ tenānvabhāviṣṭhā nānvabhāvi tvayāpyasau. anubhūto

mayā cāsau tena cānvabhaviṣyaham.. BHAṬṬ. 5, 35. — caus. 1) «Jmd

Etwas empfinden —, erfahren lassen»: svadurnayaphalaṁ devyāḥ

prakopenānubhāvitaḥ RĀJA-TAR. 6, 255. — 2) «zu Gesicht bringen»:

(vrahmaṇi) ekabhaktyanubhāvite (= aparokṣīkṛte Schol.) BHĀG. P. 3, 24,

43. — 3) «kräftigen, stärken» BHĀG. P. 1, 15, 13. — desid. «zu empfinden

—, zu geniessen wünschen»: yo rājā sukhānyanububhūṣati MBH. 12, 3532.

— Vgl. anubhava fgg., anubhū fg.

pratyanu «im Einzelnen geniessen»: deśadigantaraiśca

pratyanubhūtaṁ punaḥ punaḥ pratyanubhavati PRAŚNOP. 4, 5. VYUTP. 8.

169.

bhū (= 1. bhū) 1) adj. am Ende eines comp. Decl. P. 6, 4, 85. fg. VOP. 3,

50. «werdend, entstehend, entstanden, seiend» H. 6. sarvabhūtātmabhū

«die Seele aller Geschöpfe seiend» MBH. 12, 7112. agni-, indra- Nn. prr.

Ind. St. 4, 374. Vgl. akṣi-, agni-, aśleṣā-, āṣāḍhā-, gādhi-, giri-, citta-,

deva-, naga-, nābhi-, nīla- (wohl «aus dem Gebirge» Nīla «entspringend»),

padma-, punarbhū, puru-, puro-, bharaṇī-, mano-, muhurbhū, viṣṭhā-,

śaṁ-, sacā-, su-, svayaṁ-. Selbständig als Beiw. Viṣṇu’s (= sattārūpa

Schol.) MBH. 12, 1509. — 2) f. a) «das Werden, Entstehen» P. 1, 4, 31. =

bhavana, utpatti Sch. — b) «Weltraum»: bhūrjajña uttānapado bhuva āśā

ajāyanta ṚV. 10, 72, 4. pl. «Welträume, Welten»: bhuvo

vivasvānanvātatāna AV. 18, 2, 32. sa viśvā bhuva ābhavaḥ ṚV. 10, 153, 5.

asya śroṣantvā bhuvaḥ 1, 86, 5. — c) «die Erde» AK. 2, 1, 2. TRIK. 2, 1, 1.

3, 3, 289. H. 935. an. 1, 9. HALĀY. 2, 1. 5, 83. SŪRYAS. 3, 9. 4, 4.

bhūriyam R. 1, 6, 19. bhūtaye bhuvaḥ ŚĀK. 79. MEGH. 18. 47. im

Gegensatz zum Himmel und Luftraum RAGH. 3, 4. Spr. 4674. sasāgarā

RAGH. 18, 3. bhuvo bhartā so v. a. «König» 1, 74. dharmātpaijavano rājā

cirāya bubhuje bhuvam Spr. 4255. bhuvi «auf Erden» M. 7, 6. 8, 131. 381.

HIḌ. 2, 18. N. 1, 14. 10, 25. DAŚ. 2, 62. Spr. 737. MEGH. 46. -kāṇḍa Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 192,a,36. «Erde» so v. a. «Erdboden» M. 2, 216. 3, 92. 214. 244.

5, 133. SUND. 2, 24. DAŚ. 1, 32. RAGH. 1, 84. 12, 5. 91. Spr. 2054.

upānadgūḍhapādasya nanu carmāvṛteva bhūḥ 3206. AK. 1, 2, 1, 2.

HALĀY. 2, 3. VET. in LA. (II) 25, 14. pl. Spr. 2044. vāji- «Terrain für

Pferde» KĀM. NĪTIS. 19, 10. «Fussboden»: maṇimayabhuvaḥ MEGH. 65.

«Land, Ländereien»: akāla ivoptavījā bhūḥ ŚĀK.91, 14. M. 4, 189.

saśarkarā sapaṣāṇā sāṭavī nityataskarā. rūkṣā sakaṇṭakavanā savyālā

ceti bhūrabhūḥ.. KĀM. NĪTIS. 4, 53. bhuvāṁ sāravatīnām Spr. 4667.

RĀJA-TAR. 5, 121. «Erde» (als Stoff) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 105,a,3. «Raum, Ort,

Platz»; = sthāna TRIK. 3, 3, 289. kayā bhuvā ni dadhe dhenurūdhaḥ ṚV.

3, 55, 13. pitaro bhūḥ PAÑCAV. BR. 1, 1, 5. upavana- ad ŚĀK. 14.

vanabhuvaḥ (pl.) Spr. 311. svargataraṁgiṇītaṭabhuvi 2256. 3401.

sarastīra- NĪLAK. zu N. 13, 5. yuddhāpasāra- KĀM. NĪTIS. 12, 23.

niyuddha- H. 801. abhyāsa- 788. amedhyapracaya- Spr. 2994.

amṛtarasaprasyandamādhvīka- KUSUM. 1, 8. Vgl. kūla-, keśa-, geha-,

deva-, pāṭha-, pīṭha-, puṇya-, baddha-. eine der drei vyāhṛti (s. d.) in der

Formel bhūrbhuvaḥ svaḥ M. 2, 76. MĀRK. P. 101, 23; vgl. bhūr und

bhūrloka. — d) «die Basis eines Dreiecks» oder «einer anderen Figur»

COLEBR. Alg. 69. — e) «Gegenstand» (vgl. sthāna):

vivādasaṁvādabhuvaḥ «des Streites und der Uebereinstimmung» BHĀG.

P. 6, 4, 31. — f) (als N. der «Erde)» Bez. «der Zahl Eins» WEBER, JYOT.

101. NAX. II, 382. — g) Bez. «des Buchstabens» la WEBER, RĀMAT. UP.

318. Ind. St. 2, 316. — h) «Opfer- feuer» JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — 3) m. N.

eines Ekāha ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 17, 1. KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 1, 3.

bhū Z. 14 füge 10, 112, 10 nach 1, 76, 4 hinzu. 1) e) ṚV. 7, 32, 13. — 2)

yadi yatno bhavenmartyaḥ sadyaḥ phalamavāpnuyāt «wenn die

Anstrengung Etwas vermöchte, wenn die Anstrengung es thäte, wenn es

auf die Anstrengung ankäme» MBH. 13, 7600.

caus. 7) SĀH. D. 121, 12. — 10) bhāvita «parfümirt» KATHĀS. 70, 43.

anu caus. 4) «läutern» BHĀG. P. 3, 14, 47.

ud 2) udbhūtasaṭābhāra (siṁha) «erhoben» KATHĀS. 96, 40.

pari caus. 5) «weiterverbreiten, unter die Leute bringen»

UTTARARĀMAC. 132, 7 (177, 6).

pra 3) prabhūta «stattlich, gross» HARIV. 4479. 4481.

bhū 2) «es zu Etwas bringen, sein Ziel erreichen» Spr. (II) 291. — 3) yaśo

bhavati ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 1, 5. 4, 2, 4, 9. — caus. 1) so v. a. «üben,

ausüben»: vratam HEM. YOGAŚ. 1, 25. fgg.

paryā PAT. a. a. O.3,97,b.

pra 4) Sp. 327, Z. 6. fgg. bhavacchidi HEM. YOGAŚ. 3, 141.

anupra auch ṚV. 7, 77, 3.

saṁvi caus. s. saṁvibhāvya.

sam 8) mit dem loc. eines nom. act. Spr. (II) 1669. — caus. 1)

ujjayinyāḥ prasthito māhiṣmatyāṁ sūryodramanaṁ saṁbhāvayate so v.

a. «erreicht mit Sonnenaufgang» Māh. PAT. a. a. O.3,28,a.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

bhū(Ḥ) In the creation of the world, the Lord broke the beginningless

«Aṇḍa» (the primal egg or seed) and from it the sound «Oṁ» emerged.

The first sound of it was «BHŪḤ»; the second was «BHUVAḤ»; and the

third was «SVAḤ». So the combination «Bhūr Bhuvaḥ Svaḥ» was formed.

Then came the most adorable and superlative effulgence of the creator

(Savitā). That radiance dried up all water. A little of the water became a

highly viscous substance. This viscous matter gradually solidified and

became the earth. Where the aṇḍa originally was became the source of

that supreme effulgence. As it was the first radiant light, it came to be

called Āditya (ādi=first). The great procreator Brahmā seemed to emerge

from the centre of the aṇḍa. The garbhajala (the water contained in the

aṇḍa) became the oceans and rivers of the world. (Vāmana Purāṇa,

Chapter 43).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

bhū 1. bhū, i. 1, Par. Ātm.

1. To become, Man. 1, 9; with anyathā, To be changed, to fail, Pañc.

187, 1; na jātu anyathā, To be unalterable, Chr. 50, 6.

2. To spring up, Bhag. 14, 17.

3. To be MBh. 2, 150; auxiliary verb, Rām. 1, 41, 3; with agre, To

precede, Pañc. 215, 13.

4. To behave, Pañc. iii. d. 61.

5. To take place, Pañc. 4, 15; to be possible, Pañc. 33, 6; to be asked,

Man. 12, 108.

6. With dat. To serve to, to cause; e. g. vināśāya, Causes destruction,

MBh. 3, 12312; saṁgamāya, To unite, Vikr. d. 129.

7. With gen. To belong to; e. g. dhanaṁ bhaviṣyati me, I shall have

wealth; to fall to one’s share, Hit. iii. d. 104; to befall, Hit. pr. d. 28, M. M.

8. With loc. To be occupied with, MBh. 5, 205; Pañc. iii. d. 258

(bhaviṣyant, Who will be occupied, i. e. who begins).

9. To live, to exist, MBh. 3, 2372.

10. With na, To perish. Pañc. 164, 13; MBh. 1, 2781.

11. With punar, To marry a second time, Man. 9, 175.

12. To obtain (with acc.), MBh. 1, 5366.

13. Impersonal pass. with instr., literally, It is existed by = exists; e.

g. yair cva bhūmipālair bhaviṣyate, literally, ‘by whom will be existed

kings,’ i. e. ‘who were to be kings,’ Rājat. 5, 418.

14. bhavatu, imperat.

3. sing. a May be, but, Śāk. 64, 8. b. Stop, Śāk. 12, 12. c. Well, Vikr. 4,

2. d. No matter, Śāk. 7, 17; 9, 18. ved. conjunctive of the aor. bhuvat,

Lass. 99, 3 = Rigv. v. 9, 7. Ptcple. of the pf. pass. bhūta.

1. Been, become, Arj. 3, 28; Pañc. ii. d. 2 (bhū-tāra-bhūto ‘paraḥ,

Become, or being, a second Saviour of the world).

2. Being, Pañc. i. d. 324; consisting of, Hit. 114, 22 (śaktu- perhaps to

be read śaktu-pūrṇaḥ).

3. Gone, past, former, Pañc. iii. d. 136.

4. Proper, right.

5. True. m. and n.

1. A malignant spirit, Chr. 37, 2.

2. A living being, a creature, Man. 1, 50; 95; 2, 159; Pañc. iii. d. 136.

m.

1. A son, a child.

2. A demigod of a particular kind.

3. Śiva. n. An element, Vedāntas. in Chr. 206, 19; Bhāṣāp. 28; five

bhūtas are enumerated: earth, fire, water, air, and aether. Comp.

ātmabhūta, i. e. ātman-, adj. true to himself, Man. 7, 217. ittham-, adj. so

natured, Pañc. 31, 17 (read as one word). evam-, adj. such, Hit. 10, 7, M.

M.; 84, 14. tīrtha-, adj. hallowed, MBh. 13, 1725. divā-, adj. become as

clear as the day, MBh. 14, 1757. mahā-, n. a primary element, as earth,

etc., Man. 1, 6. vahirbhūta, i. e. vahis, adj. produced. sadbh°, i. e. sant-

(ptcple. pres. of 1. as), adj. true. Ptcple. of the fut. pass.

I. bhavitavya, What is or ought to be, Chr. 50, 8; 58, 2; used as

impersonal pass., Śāk. 22, 17, bhavitavyaṁ tvayā sahāyena mama, You

must become my helpmate; avahita is bhavadbhiḥ, You must be

attentive, Vikr. 3, 9; asmābhis tathā bhavitavyam, We will fare thus, Hit.

16, 7, M. M.

II. bhavya.

1. What is or ought to be, Sāv. 5, 47.

2. Being.

3. Good, pleasant, Pañc. 215, 6; Lass. 92, 8; profitable, Pañc. 228, 24;

proper, Pañc. 138, 11.

4. True. m. A tree, Averhoa Carambola, Lass. 52, 12. f. yā, A name of

Umā. n.

1. Fruit.

2. Existence. Comp. a-, adj. 1. what is or ought not to be, Pañc. 91, 6.

2. unhappy. 3. deceitful.

4. wicked, Rām. 3, 52, 14.

III. bhāvya,

1. What must or ought to be, Rām. 3, 49, 13; Bhartṛ. 2, 91; Pañc. 88,

19.

2. To be investigated (from the Caus.). Comp. a-, adj. what is not to

be, or not predestined to be, Bhartṛ. 2, 91. durbh°, i. e. dus-, adj, difficult

to be imagined, Mārk. P. 10, 7 (from the Caus.). Desider. bubhūṣa.

1. To wish to be or to live, MBh. 4. 678.

2. To wish to obtain, to choose, MBh. 1, 7068. Caus. bhāvaya.

1. To cause to exist, to produce, MBh. 1, 8419.

2. To support, MBh. 3, 8763.

3. To make manifest, Man. 8, 60.

4. (i. 10), To (imagine, to) reflect, to consider, Rām. 2, 67, 20; Pañc.

iii. d. 63; Rājat. 5, 125 (bhāvita-ātman, adj. One who reflects about the

universal soul).

5. (i. 10), To obtain, Rām. 1, 44, 48.

6. (i. 10), To purify.

7. (i. 10), † To mix. bhāvita,

1. Animated.

2. Occupied with.

3. Imagined.

4. Acknowledged.

5. Feigned, Daśak. in Chr. 187, 6.

6. Obtained.

7. Mixed.

8. Infused.

9. Perfumed.

— With the prep. ati ati, To surpass, MBh. 3, 10731.

— With the noun a-darśana, becoming adarśanī adarśanī, To become

invisible, Pañc. 34, 24; 106, 20.

— With adhara, becoming adharī adharī, adharībhūta, Putdown, i. e.

admitted, Yājñ. 2, 17 (cf. Roer, transl. n.).

— With the prep. adhi adhi, adhibhāta, n. The Supreme Being, Bhag. 8, 4.

— With anu anu,

1. To be present at (acc.), Nal. 5, 40.

2. To feel, Man. 12, 17; Vikr. d. 110.

3. To suffer, Daśak. in Chr. 195, 19.

4. To enjoy, Pañc. 38, 5.

5. To learn, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 23.

6. To perceive, MBh. 3, 2112. Comp. ptcple. of the pf. pass. an-

anubhūta, adj. Not perceived, Hit. 47, 18.

— With samanu sam-anu,

1. To enjoy together, Lass. 6, 4.

2. To perceive, Ragh. 9, 48.

— With anu-guṇa, becoming anuguṇī anuguṇī, To increase in proportion

(to the obstacle), Vikr. d. 49 (cf. śataguṇī bhū).

— With antar antar, To be comprised in, Man. 12, 87.

— With the noun andha, becoming andhī andhī, To become blind, Pañc.

200, 1.

— With the prep. abhi abhi,

1. To attain, Vikr. d. 38.

2. To assail, Bhag. 1, 40.

3. To overpower, Man. 7, 179.

4. To surpass, Man. 7, 5.

5. To spread over (acc.), MBh. 3, 10592. abhibhūta,

1. Overpowered, Pañc. 169, 21; Vcdāntas. in Chr. 215, 11.

2. Aggrieved, Pañc. 80, 10.

3. Perplexed.

— With ā ā, To exist, to live, MBh. 1, 3608.

— With the noun ākula, becoming ākulī ākulī, To be perplexed, Śāk. 29,

23.

— With the indeed. āvis āvis, To become visible. āvirbhūta, Appeared, Utt.

Rāmac. 100, 14; become visible, Vikr. d. 8; 78, 20.

— With the prep. ud ud, To spring up, to arise, Rājat. 5, 2, 6. udbhūta,

1. Born, produced.

2. Proceeded, Ṛt. 1, 24.

3. Lofty.

4. Vi-ii-le, present.

5. Proportionate, Bhāṣāp. 53; 54. Caus.

1. To cause to exist, Bhaṭṭ. 17, 8.

2. To bring to consciousness, Vedāntas. in Chr. 206, 9.

3. To apply, Ragh. 2, 62. udbhāvita,

1. Neglected.

2. Said.

— With prod pra-ud, prodbhūta,

1. Breaking forth, Lass. 11, 12.

2. Proceeding, come, Pañc. i. d. 18.

— With samud sam-ud, To spring up, to arise, Pañc. 42, 1. samudbhūta,

Born, produced, Pañc. i. d. 392; 42, 1.

— With the numeral eka, becoming ekī ekī, To unite, MBh. 1, 919

— With eka-chitta, becoming ekacittī ekacittī, and cka-mati, becoming

ekamatī ekamatī, To become unanimous, Hit. 27, 3, M. M.; Pañc. 175, 19.

— With kaṭhora, becoming kaṭhorī kaṭhorī, kaṭhoribhūta, Grown sharp,

hot, Utt. Rāmac. 40, 9.

— With kuṇḍala, becoming kuṇḍalī kuṇḍalī, To ringle, Bhāg. P. 5. 23, 5.

— With kṣapaṇa, becoming kṣapaṇī kṣapaṇī, To become a Bauddha

mendicant, Daśak. in Chr. 192, 16.

— With kkila, becoming khilī khilī, khilībhūta,

1. Wasted, impervious, Kumāras. 2, 45.

2. Vanished, Śāk. d. 149.

— With guṇa, becoming guṇī guṇī, guṇībhūta,

1. Made secondary, MBh. 2, 670.

2. Become an ornament, Kāvyapr. 48, 7.

3. Invested with attributes.

4. Varied.

5. Having a certain force or application (as a word) [gunated].

— With gocara, becoming gocarī gocarī, To become visible, Utt. Rāmac.

155, 1.

— With ghana, becoming ghanī ghanī, ghanībhūta, Thickened, become

thick, Rām. 3, 5, 8.

— With cūrṇa, becoming cūrṇī cūrṇī, To turn into dust, to be pounded,

Vikr. d. 4.

— With caura, becoming caurī To become a thief, Bhāg. P. 4, 18, 7.

— With jarjara, becoming jarjarī jarjarī, jarjarībhūta, Decayed, Lass. 7, 9.

— With jhaṇajhaṇā, becoming jhaṇajhaṇī jhaṇajhaṇī, -bhūta, Rattling,

MBh. 6, 738.

— With taruṇī taruṇī, To become marriageable, Daśak. in Chr. 186, 22.

— With the indecl. tiras tiras, To disappear, Bhāg. P. 9, 4, 53. Caus. To

remove, Rām. 1, 44, 9.

— With tīvra, becoming tīvrī tīvrī,-bhūta, Heavy, Rājat. 6, 99.

— With tūṣṇīm tūṣṇīm, To become silent, Pañc. 193, 12. tūṣṇīṁbhūta,

Silent, MBh. 1, 7951.

— With the noun dūra, becoming dūrī dūrī, To retire, Pañc. 19, 14 (sarvair

dūribhūtam, All retired).

— With dṛḍha, becoming dṛḍhī dṛḍhī, To become strong, Pañc. iii. d. 258.

— With drava, becoming dravī dravī, dravībhūta,

1. Become liquid, Mārk. P. 12, 38.

2. Melted, Utt. Rāmac. 60, 5.

— With dvaṁdva, becoming dvaṁdvī dvaṁdvī, -bhūta, Engaged in close

fight, MBh. 7, 3577.

— With dvaidha, becoming dvadhī dvaidhī, To become divided, Śāk. d. 50.

— With nava, becoming navī navī, To be renewed, Ragh. 12, 56.

— With nikaṭa, becoming nikaṭī nikaṭī, -bhūta, Approached, Kathās. 19,

87.

— With niḥsva, i. e. nis-sva, becoming niḥsvī niḥsvī, To become poor,

Daśak. in Chr. 193, 5.

— With nirāśa, i. e. nis- (cf. āśā), becoming nirāśī nirāśī, To become

hopeless, Pañc. 21, 15.

— With the prep. parā parā, To perish, MBh. 1, 4167. parābhūta,

1. Defeated, Pañc. 151, 11.

2. Humbled, treated with contempt, Pañc. 82, 7.

— With the noun parāṅmukha, i. e. parāñc-mukha, becoming parāṅmukhī

parāṅmukhī,

1. To turn away, to turn the back, Lass. 24, 20.

2. To be disinclined, Mālav. 68, 8. parāṅmukhībhūta, Being adverse,

Pañc. 121, 16.

— With the prep. pari pari, To despise, MBh. 3, 1025.

2. To grieve, Pañc. 47, 2.

3. To injure, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 2375. Caus. To make known, Utt. Rāmac.

177, 6.

— With saṁpari sam-pari, To despise, MBh. 3, 13230.

— With the noun paryutsuka, becoming paryutsukī paryutsukī, To become

very sad, Śāk. d. 99.

— With pātra, becoming pātrī pātrī, To become a worthy person, MBh. 4,

1513.

— With the prep. pra pra,

1. To spring up, Hit. i. d. 26, M. M.; to proceed, Hit. 13, 8; to rise, pr.

47, M. M.

2. To be brought forth, MBh. 3, 17164.

3. To appear, Megh. 15.

4. To become prevalent, Hit. i. d. 86, M. M.; to be powerful, pra

bhavati + tarām, It is most powerful, Vikr. d. 156; with na, to be

powerless, Pañc. 52, 5.

5. To prevail over, Man. 5, 2; Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 814; to be master of

(with gen.), Hit. i. d. 193, M. M.

6. To be able, to serve (with inf. and dat.), Hit. i. d. 96, M. M.; Vikr. d.

9; 55; Ragh. 3, 44. prabhūta,

1. Large, Pañc. 47, 25; much, Pañc. 69, 8; long, 4, 17.

2. Abounding in, distinguished, Daśak. in Chr. 180, 15.

3. Comparat. Very large, Pañc. 95, 24.

4. Superl. Highest, Daśak. in Chr. 180, 15.

— With prakaṭa, becoming prakaṭī prakaṭī, To become visible, Śiś. 9, 23;

known, Pañc. 223, 19.

— With pracura, becoming pracurī pracurī, To increase, Śiś. 9, 20.

— With praṇayin, becoming praṇayī praṇayī, To become affectionate or

attached to, Suśr. 1, 236, 17.

— With praṇidhi, becoming praṇidhī praṇidhī, To become a spy, Pañc. 172,

6.

— With pratyantara (see s. v.), becoming pratyantarī pratyantarī, To be

near, Utt. Rāmac. 53, 5.

— With preman-rāśi, becoming premarāśī premarāśī, To become a heap,

(a great) store of love, Megh. 111.

— With prādus prādus, To become manifest or visible, to appear, Pañc.

235, 22.

— With bandhakī bandhakī, To become a harlot, Rājat. 5, 466.

— With bahula, becoming bahulī bahulī, To be multiplied, Pañc. ii. d. 187;

bahulībhūta, Generally known, Śāk. 79, 11.

— With bhasman, becoming bhasmī bhasmī, To become mere ashes,

Man. 4, 188; Pañc. iii. d. 155. bhasmībhūta, Mere ashes, i. e. wholly

worthless, Man. 3, 97.

— With bhṛtya, becoming bhṛtyī bhṛtyī, To become a servant, Rājat. 5, 51.

— With manda, becoming mandī mandī, -bhūta, Become slack or dull,

tired, Johns. Sel. 15, 58.

— With malina, becoming malinī malinī, To become soiled, Śāk. d. 176.

— With rahas, becoming rahī rahī, rahibhūta, Solitary, alone.

— With rāśi, becoming rāśī rāśī, -bhūta, Heaped, Rājat. 5, 190.

— With vaśa, becoming vaśī vaśī, -bhūta, Subject to another’s will.

— With the prep. vi vi, Caus.

1. To trace out, Man. 8, 25.

2. To observe, Śiś. 9, 81.

3. To perceive, Vikr. 31, 6; Pañc. 198, 1, v. d. 7; to feel, Vikr. d. 132;

to recognise, Vikr. 54, 12; pass. to appear, Pañc. 45, 13.

4. To prove, Man. 8, 56.

5. To decide, Pañc. 210, 10. vibhāvita,

1. Seen, perceived, Vikr. d. 96 (vibhāvita-ekadeśa, That with whom is

seen a part of a stolen object).

2. Judged.

3. Conceived.

4. Established.

5. Put right, Daśak. in Chr. 192, 14(?). Comp. a-, 1. unobserved, Man.

7, 147. 2. not perceived, Śiś. 9, 40. Comp. ptcple. of the fut. pass. a-

vibhāvya, not to be perceived, Śiś. 9, 12. durv°, i. e. dus-, difficult to be

understood, Rām. 2, 24, 33.

— With vi-phala, becoming viphalī viphalī, To become fruitless, Pañc. 174,

12.

— With viṣama, i. e. vi-sama, becoming viṣamī viṣamī, To stumble, Śāk. d.

90.

— With viṣaya, becoming viṣayī viṣayī, To become the province, property,

Pañc. 25, 9.

— With vaira, becoming verī vairī, To be changed into hate, Śāk. d. 120.

— With vyakta (vb. vi-añj), becoming vyaktī vyaktī, To become visible,

Rājat. 5, 240.

— With vyākula, becoming vyākulī vyākulī, To become perplexed, Paṅc.

46, 1 (bhūtvā, against gramm.), anxious, Pañc. 142, 3.

— With śata-guṇa, becoming śataguṇī śataguṇī, -bhūta, Become a

hundred times as many, or stronger, Vikr. d. 49, v. r.

— With śithila, becoming śithilī śithilī, To become loosened, to slacken,

Hit. iv. d. 79.

— With śiśira, becoming śiśirī śiśirī, To become cool, Utt. Rāmac. 158, 10.

— With śucki, becoming śucī śucī, To become pure, to purify one’s self,

Pañc. 221, 7.

— With śūdra, becoming śudrī śūdrī, To become a Śūdra, Man. 10, 92.

— With śyāma, becoming śyāmī śyāmī, To become dark blue, Kir. 5, 37.

— With śreṇi/ī, becoming śreṇī śreṇi, śreṇībhūta, Formed in lines, Megh.

22.

— With sajja, becoming sajjī sajjī,

1. To be accoutred, Hit. 59, 9 (sajjībhūya, in full decoration).

2. To be ready, Hit. 76, 20.

— With the prep. sam sam,

1. To be together, MBh. 1, 5658; to unite, Hit. 107, 19.

2. To be composed, Man. 1, 27.

3. To accrue, Man. 8, 255; Pañc. 192, 3.

4. To meet with (instr.), Daśak. in Chr. 201; 6.

5. To have sexual intercourse with (instr.), MBh. 1, 4398.

6. To become, Chr. 63, 64.

7. To spring up, to arise, to proceed, Vedāntas. in Chr. 206, 17.

8. To be engendered, Johns. Sel. 1, 2; to be born, Rām. 1, 43, 2.

9. To take place, Chr. 39, 2; to happen, Hit. 17, 4, M. M.

10. To be, Hit. 97, 17; to exist, Hit. 130, 12.

11. To be adequate, Lass. 76, 16.

12. To be able to exist, Matsyep. 12.

13. To be able, Śiś. 1, 27.

14. To be possible, Hit. 99, 6. sambhūta,

1. Combined with.

2. Adequate.

3. Born. Caus.

1. To cause to be with, to meet, MBh. 3, 1982.

2. To cause to get, to deliver, Pañc. 84, 17; Ragh. 16, 40.

3. To confide to, MBh. 1, 2088.

4. To cause to exist, MBh. 1, 1425.

5. To cause to recover, Utt. Rāmac. 78, 13.

6. To nourish, Man. 2, 142.

7. To preserve, MBh. 1, 1343.

3. To appoint, Pañc. ii. d. 25.

9. To make, MBh. 3, 13316.

10. To manifest, to show, Daśak. in Chr. 188, 12.

11. To prove, Mālav. 21, 17.

12. To think, to represent, Śāk. 21, 6; to take for, Pañc. 78, 18.

13. With anyathā, To misunderstand, Śāk. 17, 5.

14. To consider, Pañc. iii. d. 208; Ragh. 6, 42.

15. To believe, Pañc. 111, 10.

16. To honour, Bhartṛ. 2, 27; Utt. Rāmac. 47, 14.

17. To expect, Pañc. iv. d. 81. sambhāvita,

1. Adequate, suited.

2. Possible.

3. Considered, reflected.

4. Satisfied. Ptcple. of the fut. pass. sambhāvya, Suitable, Pañc. 117,

11. Comp. a-, adj. impossible, Pañc. 30, 8; v. d. 59.

— With su-varṇa, becoming suvarṇī suvarṇī, To turn into gold, Pañc. 192,

2.

— With stambha, becoming stambhī stambhī, To become a post, Hit. i. d.

29, M. M.

— With sthira, becoming sthirī sthirī, To be calm, Lass. 43, 17.

— With sphāra, becoming skārī spkarī, To become large, to spread,

Häberl. Anth. 217, 8; Pañc. v. d. 22; Mṛcch. 49, 6 (to show a hidden

property in a magical way, by becoming large, or by throbbing).

— Cf. [greek] (cf. bhavant), probably [greek] perhaps [greek] Lat. fio, fui,

facio (causal), fecundus, fetus, fetare, perhaps femur, femen; O.H.G. pim,

pis, etc.; A.S. beón, beó, bist, etc.; Goth. ga-bauan; O.H.G. būwan, būan,

pu, būr; A. S. buan, bur; O.H.G. būari.

bhū 2. bhū, f.

1. The earth, Pañc. iii. 77.

2. pl. Landed property, land, Hit. iv. d. 121.

3. Ground, Megh. 65 (at the end of a comp. adj.).

4. Site, place, Kir. 5, 5.

5. Sacrificial fire.

6. Nom. sing. bhūs, indecl.

1. Earth, Man. 2, 76.

2. Hell.

— Comp. pāna-, f, a drinking-room, Kathās. 21, 10. malla-, f. an arena for

athletic contests. paricita-, adj. of which the places are known, Utt.

Rāmac. 42, 11.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

bhū bhavati1 v (bhavate), pp. bhūta (q.v.) become, be (nom. or adv. in ī

or ū), rise, appear, happen, occur; exist, live (w. na cease to be, perish,

die), stay, abide; be possible or suitable; befall, fall to the lot of, belong

to (gen., r. dat. or loc.); serve for, tend or conduce to (dat. of th.),

devote one’s self to, be occupied with (loc.); get something i.e. thrive,

prosper, be lucky (±idam); turn out well, succeed. bhavet may be,

granted; bhaṁvatu good, possible, enough of this. C. bhāvayati te, pp.

bhāvita (q.v.) bring into existence or being, produce, effect, cause;

cherish, further, refresh, comfort; practise, exercise; get possessed of,

obtain; show, manifest, call to mind, imagine, consider, know, take for (2

acc.); convince, convict, state, establish; mingle, mix, saturate, steep. D.

bubhūṣati (-te) wish to become or be, to rise or thrive, endeavour at

(acc.); like, prefer, honour, esteem. I. bobhavīti be repeatedly, use to be.

ati be or become in a high degree; excel, overcome (acc.).

anu be after, come up with, attain, equal; embrace, comprehend,

include; help, serve, further; enjoy, feel, experience, suffer; perceive,

hear, learn.

samanu enjoy, experience.

antar be within, penetrate.

apa be absent or wanting.

abhi be against, surpass, overcome, oppress, harass, humiliate; turn

to, approach or present with (instr.).

ā be present or at hand; exist, live on; come forth, spring from (abl.).

anvā follow, imitate.

abhyā occur, happen.

ud come forth, arise, grow, increase, be sufficient or equal. C. bring

forth, produce, develop, display.

samud spring forth, arise, increase.

upa approach, assist. tiras be absent or lost, disappear, vanish. C.

cause to disappear, dispel.

nis be off, move on.

parā perish, be lost, succumb, yield; overcome, conquer, harm, hurt,

injure. C. overthrow, destroy.

pari surround, encompass, comprehend, include; attend, manage,

take care of (acc.); surpass, overcome, vanquish; hurt, injure, despise,

disgrace; mock, scoff.

pra come forth, spring up, arise, appear, happen, occur, spread,

expand, increase, grow; be numerous or strong, prevail, rule over,

dispose of (gen., loc., or dat.); be equal to or a match for (dat.), be able

to or capable of (infin.); be of use, profit, avail (dat.). C. augment,

increase, strengthen, nourish, further.

prati equal (acc.). C. observe, learn, know. bi expand, develop, arise,

appear; suffice for, be equal to, attain, pervade, fill (dat. or acc.), be able

to (infin.). C. cause to expand or develop, open, show, manifest;

separate, divide; discern, discover, perceive, know, recognize or

acknowledge as, take for (2 acc.), deliberate, ponder, fancy, imagine,

suppose, establish, prove, convict, convince. P. be considered as, pass

for, appear, seem (nom.).

sam come or be together, assemble, meet, be united with (instr.

±saha or loc.), have sexual intercourse with (instr. ±saha or sārdham &

acc.); be held or contained in (loc.); originate, be produced or

engendered, be born, spring from (abl.), happen, occur, exist, become,

be, fall to a person’s (loc. or gen.) share or lot, be possible, be able to or

capable of (infin.). C. bring together, produce, accomplish, make that-

(pp.); go to meet, betake one’s self to, salute, honour, gratify or present

with (instr.); combine, think, judge (anyathā falsely); imagine, suppose,

give a person (loc.) credit for (acc.), consider as, take for (2 acc.) P. be

possible.

abhisam attain, get possessed of, participate in (acc.). — Cf.

antarbhūta ūdbhūta prabhūta samudbhūta saṁbhūta saṁbhūya.

bhū [2] a. becoming, being, sprung from (—°); f. becoming, existing, the

universe (pl. the worlds), the earth, land, country, place, ground.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

bhū bhū, a. (-°) becoming, arising, proceeding or produced from; being,

existing; f. place of being, space (pl. spaces, worlds: V.); earth; ground;

floor; land, landed property; earth (as a substance); place, spot; subject

(of dispute etc.): lc. on earth; on the ground;

bhuvo bhartṛ, m. lord of earth, king.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

bhū sattāyām . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°para°-aka°-seṭ .) satteha

dvividhā . utpattirvidyamānatā ca . bhavati manuṣyo’thavā viṣṇuḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

bhū ka śuddhicintayoḥ . miśraṇe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (curā°-para°-

saka°-seṭ .) ka, tṛṇavadbhāvayati dviṣaḥ sarvān . trayo’rthāḥ . iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

bhū ka ṅa prāptau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°ātma°-saka°-seṭ .) ka

ṅa, bhāvayate . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

bhū ña prāptau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (bhvā°-ubha°saka°-seṭ .) ña,

bhavati bhavate dhanaṁ dhīraḥ . bhavatyeva sattāyāṁ

prāptisampannajanmasviti bhaṭṭamallaḥ . bhavate duritakṣayaṁ

yathoktakratubhirbhāvayate ca nākalokamiti halāyudhaḥ . kecidamuṁ

bhvādyātmanepadinaṁ matvā prāptau parasmaipadaṁ

sattārthasyaivānekārthatvāt samādhatte . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

bhū vya, (bhū + kvip .) rasātalam . iti hemacandraḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

bhū prāptau cu° ā° saka° seṭ . bhāvayata abībhavata .

bhū prāptau bhvā° u° saka° seṭ . bhavati—te abhūt abhaviṣṭa .

bhū śuddhau aka° cintane miśraṇe ca saka° curā° ubha° seṭ .

bhāvayati—te abībhavat—ta .

bhū sattāyāṁ bhvā° para° aka° seṭ . bhavati abhūt babhūva . bhavate

duritakṣayaṁ yathoktaiḥ kratubhirbhāvayate ca nāgalokam . bhavati

tridaśaiśca pūjito yastṛṇavadbhāvayati dviṣaśca sarvān kavira0

adhi—ādhikyena bhavane aiśvarye .

anu—anubhave jñānabhede saka° anubhavaśabde dṛśyam .

antar + tirobhāve aka° .

abhi + tiraskāre saka° . abhibhavati śatrūn .

āvis + prādus + prathamaprakāśe .

ud—utpattau aka° .

tiras antardhāne sthitasya vastunaḥ kāraṇātmanā’vasthāne aka0

parā + asahane parābhavaḥ .

pari + tiraskāre paribhavati atikramya bhavane .

prata + tulyarūpabhavane aka° pratibhūḥ .

vi + vyāptau vibhuḥ .

vi + ati—parasparabhavane ātma° saka° vyabhibhavate’rkaminduḥ .

bopadevaḥ

sam + yogyatve aka° . sambhāti sam + bhū—ṇic

sambhāvanārūpajñānaviṣayatve sambhāvyate .

bhū strī bhū—ādhāre kartari apādāne vā yathāyatham kvip . 1 bhūmau

amaraḥ 2 sthānamātre medi° 3 yajñāgnau pu° jaṭā° 4 utpadyamāna tri° 5

parameśvare pu° anirviṇṇaḥ sthaviṣṭho bhūḥ viṣṇu sa° .

भूः — bhūḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

bhūḥ f. [bhū-kvip]

(1) The earth (opp. aṁtarīkṣa or svarga); divaṁ marutvāniva

bhokṣyate bhuvaṁ R. 3. 4, 18. 4; Me. 18; mattebhakuṁbhadalane bhuvi

saṁti śūrāḥ

(2) Earth as one of the nine substances.

(3) The universe, globe.

(4) Ground, floor; prāsādoparibhūmayaḥ Mu. 3; maṇibhayabhuvaḥ

(prāsādāḥ) Me. 64.

(5) Land, landed property.

(6) A place, site, region, plot of ground; kānanabhuvi, upavanabhuvi

&c.

(7) Matter, subjectmatter.

(8) A symbolical expression for the number ‘one’.

(9) The base of a geometrical figure. (10) A sacrificial fire.

(11) The act of becoming, arising.

(12) The first of the three Vyāhṛtis or mystic syllables (representing

the earth) repeated by every Brāhmaṇa at the commencement of his

daily Sandhyā.

— Comp.

—uttamaṁ gold.

—kadaṁbaḥ a kind of Kadamba tree.

—kaṁpaḥ an earthquake.

—karṇaḥ the diameter of the earth.

—kaśyapaḥ an epithet of Vasudeva, Kṛṣṇa’s father.

—kākaḥ 1. a kind of heron. —2. the curlew. —3. a kind of pigeon.

—keśaḥ the fig-tree.

—keśā a female demon, demoness.

—kṣit m. a hog.

—garaṁ a particular poison.

—garbhaḥ 1. N. of Viṣṇu. —2. an epithet of Bhavabhūti.

—gṛhaṁ, —gehaṁ a cellar, a room underground.

—golaḥ the terrestrial globe; bhūgolamudbibhrate Gīt. 1. -vidyā

geography.

—ghanaḥ the body.

—cakraṁ the equator.

—cara a. moving or living on land. (

—raḥ) 1. any landanimal (opp. jalavara). —2. an epithet of Śiva.

—caryā, —chāyā, —chāyaṁ

(1) earth’s shadow (vulgarly called Rāhu). —2. darkness. —jaṁtuḥ 1 a

kind of earthworm. —2. an elephant. —jaṁbuḥ —būḥ f. wheat. —talaṁ the

surface of the earth. —tṛṇaḥ, —bhūstṛṇaḥ a kind of fragrant grass —dāraḥ

a hog. —devaḥ —suraḥ a Brāhmaṇa. —dhanaḥ a king. —dhara a. 1. holding

or supporting the earth; Ku. 3. 13. —2. dwelling on the earth (—raḥ) 1. a

mountain. —2. an epithet of Śiva. —3. of Kṛṣṇa. —4. the number ‘seven’. —

īśvaraḥ, -rājaḥ an epithet of the mountain Himālaya. -jaḥ a tree. —dhraḥ a

mountain. —nāgaḥ a kind of earth-worm. —tetṛ m. a sovereign, ruler, king.

—paḥ a sovereign, ruler, king. —patiḥ 1. a king. —2. an epithet of Śiva. —3.

of Indra. —padaḥ a tree. —padī a particular kind of jasmine. —paridhiḥ the

circumference of the earth. —pavitraṁ cow dung. —pālaḥ 1. a king,

sovereign. —2. an epithet of king Bhoja. —pālanaṁ sovereignty, dominion.

—putraḥ, —mutaḥ 1. the planet Mars. —2. N. of the demon Naraka, q. v.

—putrī, —sutā ‘daughter of the earth’, an epithet of Sītā. —prakaṁpaḥ an

earthquake. —pradānaṁ a gift of land. —phalaḥ a kind of rat. —viṁbaḥ —

baṁ the terrestrial globe. —bhartṛ m. a king, sovereign. —bhāgaḥ a

region, place, spot. —bhuj m. a king. —bhṛt m. 1. a mountain; dātā me

bhūbhṛtāṁ nāthaḥ pramāṇīkriyatāmiti Ku. 6. 1; R. 17. 78. —2. a king,

sovereign; niṣprabhaśca ripurāsa bhūbhṛtāṁ R. 11. 81. —3. an epithet of

Viṣṇu. —maṁḍalaṁ 1. the earth, (terrestrial globe). —2. the

circumforence of the earth. —ruṁḍī a kind of sun-flower —ruh m., —ruhaḥ

a tree. —latā a worm. —lokaḥ (bhūrlokaḥ) 1. the terrestrial globe.

(2) the country on the southern part of the equator. —valayaṁ

=bhūmaṁḍalaṁ q. v. —vallabhaḥ a king, sovereign. —vṛttaṁ the equator.

—śakraḥ ‘Indra on earth’, a king, sovereign. —śayaḥ 1. an epithet of Viṣṇu.

—2. any animal lying on the earth. —śayyā lying on the ground. —śuddhiḥ

f. purification of the ground by sweeping &c. —śravas m. an anthill. —

suraḥ a Brāhmaṇa. —spṛś m. 1. a man. —2. mankind. —3. a Vaiśya. —

svargaḥ an epithet of the mountain Meru. —svāmin m. a landlord.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

bhūḥ strī, (bhavatyasminniti . bhū + adhikaraṇe kvip .) pṛthivī . ityamaraḥ

. 2 . 1 . 2 .. (yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 6 .

na cainaṁ bhuvi śaknoti kaścidapyabhivīkṣitum .. yathā ca

vaidyakaratnamālāyāmasyāḥ paryāyaḥ .

bhūrbhūmiḥ pṛthivī pṛthvī medinī vasudhāvaniḥ .

kṣitirurvī mahī kṣauṇī kṣmā dharā kurvasundharā ..) sthānamātram .

iti medinī . bhe, 1 .. (yathā, bhāgavate . 6 . 4 . 31 .

yacchaktayo vadatāṁ vādināṁ vai vivādasaṁvādabhuvo bhavanti ..

yajñāgniḥ . iti jaṭādharaḥ ..

भूमिः — bhūmiḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

bhūmiḥ f. [bhavaṁtyasmin bhūtāni, bhū-mi kicca vā ṅīp]

(1) The earth (opp. svarga, gagana or pātāla); dyaurbhūmirāpo

hṛdayaṁ yamaśca Pt. 1. 182; R. 2. 74.

(2) Soil, ground; utkhātinī bhūmiḥ S. 1; Ku. 1. 24.

(3) A territory, district, country, land; vidarbhabhūmiḥ

(4) A place, spot, ground, plot of ground; pramadavanabhūmayaḥ S.

6; adhityakābhūmiḥ N. 22. 41; R. 1. 52, 3. 61; Ku. 3. 58.

(5) A site, situation.

(6) Land, landed property.

(7) A story, the floor of a house; as in saptabhūmikaḥ prāsādaḥ.

(8) Attitude, posture.

(9) A character or part (in a play); cf. bhūmikā. (10) Subject, object,

receptacle; viśvāsabhūmi, snehabhūmi &c.

(11) Degree, extent, limit; Ki. 10. 58.

(12) The tongue.

(13) The number ‘one’.

— Comp.

—aṁtaraḥ a king of an adjacent district.

—āmalakī, -ālī N. of a plant.

—icchā a desire for lying on the ground.

—iṁdraḥ, —īśvaraḥ a king, sovereign.

—kadaṁbaḥ a kind of Kadamba.

—kaṁpaḥ an earthquake.

—gartaḥ, guhā a hole in the ground.

—gṛhaṁ a cellar, an underground chamber.

—calaḥ, -calanaṁ an earthquake.

—ja a. earth-born, born or produced from the earth. (

—jñaḥ) 1. the planet Mars. —2. an epithet of the demon Naraka. —

3. a man. —4. the plant bhūniṁba. (—jā) an epithet of Sīta.

—jīvin a. living on (the produce of) land; an agriculturist. (—m.) a

Vaiśya.

—talaṁ the surface of the earth.

—dānaṁ a grant of land.

—devaḥ a Brahmaṇa,

—dharaḥ 1. a mountain. —2. a king. —3. the number ‘seven’.

—nāthaḥ, —paḥ patiḥ, pālaḥ, —bhuj m. 1. a king, sovereign; R. 1.

47. —2. a Kshatriya.

—pakṣaḥ a swift or fleet horse.

—piśācaṁ the wine-palm.

—putraḥ the planet Mars.

—puraṁdaraḥ 1. a king. —2. N. of Dilīpa.

—bhāgaḥ a spot or portion of ground

—bhṛt m. 1. a mountain. —2. a king.

—maṁḍā a kind of jasmine.

—rakṣakaḥ 1. a guardian of a country. —2. a swift or fleet horse.

—ruhaḥ a tree.

—lābhaḥ death (lit. returning to the dust of the earth).

—lepanaṁ cow-dung.

—vardhanaḥ, -naṁ a dead body, corpse.

—śaya a. sleeping on the ground. (

—yaḥ) 1. a wild pigeon. —2. a child, boy. —3. any animal living in

the earth.

—śayanaṁ, —śayyā sleeping on the ground.

—satraṁ an offering of land.

—saṁbhavaḥ -sutaḥ 1. the planet Mars. —2. an epithet of the

demon Naraka. (

—vā, —tā) an epithet of Sītā.

—saṁniveśaḥ the general appearance of a country.

—snuḥ an earth-worm.

—spṛś a. 1. blind. —2. lame, cripple. (—m.) 1. a man. —2. mankind.

—3. a Vaiśya. —4. a thief.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

bhūmiḥ strī, (bhavanti bhūtānyasyāmiti . bhū + bhuvaḥ kit . uṇā° 4 . 45 .

iti miḥ . sa ca kit .) pṛthivī . sthānamātram . iti medinī . me, 22 ..

(yathāsyā paryāyaḥ .

bhūrbhūmiḥ pṛthivī pṛthvī medinī vasudhāvaniḥ .

kṣitirurvī mahī kṣauṇī kṣmā dharā kurvasundharā .. iti

vaidyakaratnamālāyām ..) jihvā . iti saṁkṣiptasāroṇādivṛttiḥ ..

yogināmavasthāviśeṣaḥ . yathā —

niruddhe cetasi purā savikalpasamādhinā .

nirvikalpasamādhistu bhavedatra tribhūmikaḥ ..

vyuttiṣṭhate svatastvādye dvitīye parabodhitaḥ .

ante vyuttiṣṭhate naiva sadā bhavati tanmayaḥ ..

evaṁ prāgbhūmisiddhāvapyuttarottarabhūmaye .

vidheyā bhagavadbhaktistāṁ vinā sā na sidhyati .. iti

gītāgūḍhārthadīpikāyāṁ madhusūdanasarasvatī .. bhūmeḥ paryāyādayaḥ

pṛthivīśabde draṣṭavyāḥ . asyā guṇāḥ .

bhūmeḥ sthairyaṁ gurutvañca kāṭhinyaṁ prasavārthatā .

gandho gurutvaṁ śaktiśca saṁghātaḥ sthāpanā dhṛtiḥ .. iti

mahābhārate mokṣadharmaḥ .. asyārthaḥ . sthairyamacāñcalyam 1 .

gurutvaṁ patanapratiyogī guṇaḥ 2 . kāṭhinyam 3 . prasavārthatā

dhānyādyutpattistadarthatā 4 . gandhaḥ 5 . gurutvaṁ piṇḍapuṣṭiḥ 6 .

śaktiḥ gandhagrahaṇasāmarthyam 7 . saṁghātaḥ śliṣṭāvayavatvam 8 .

sthāpanā manuṣyādyāśrayam 9 . dhṛtiḥ pāñcabhautike manasi yo

dhṛtyaṁśaḥ . iti taṭṭīkā .. * .. bhūmidānamāhātmyam yathā —

sarveṣāmeva dānānāṁ bhūmidānamanuttamam .

yo dadāti mahīṁ rājan ! viprāyākiñcanāyavai ..

aṅguṣṭhamātramathavā sa bhavet pṛthivīpatiḥ .

na bhūmidānasadṛśaṁ pavitramiha vidyate ..

bhūmiṁ yaḥ pratigṛhṇāti bhūmiṁ yaśca prayacchati .

ubhau tau puṇyamāpannau niyataṁ khargagāminau ..

yatkiñcidbhūmidānantu sarvadānottamottamam .

mahīpate ! naraḥ ko’pi bhūmido bhūmimāpnuyāt ..

bhūmidānasamaṁ dānaṁ nāstyatra pṛthivītale .

tasmādalpamalañcaiva bhuktimuktisukhapradam ..

yathā tathā prakāreṇa bhūmidātā tu bhūmipaḥ .

sukhī syāt sarvakāleṣu cānte svargamavāpnuyāt ..

bṛhadalpataraṁ vāpi bhūmidānaṁ mahattamam .

yaḥ kaścidbrāhmaṇe dattvā bhavatīha mahīpatiḥ ..

sarvathā sarvadā deyā dharitrī brāhmaṇasya tu .

prāṇāntenaiva na kvāpi haraṇīyā janairapi ..

kṛtvā khātādikaṁ karma viprabhūmiṁ naro balāt .

karoti yadi rājendra ! tat sarvaṁ niṣphalaṁ bhavet ..

brāhmaṇāddānagrahaṇaṁ vinānujñāñca pārthiva ! .

tathā tatparitoṣañca tattanmūlyādikaṁ vinā ..

viprabhūmau bhūsuro’pi daivaṁ paitraṁ tathādhvaram .

harisadma tathārāmaprāsādamaṇḍapaṁ gṛham ..

khātādikhananaṁ setubandhanaṁ bhavanaṁ gavām .

sadhānyaphalamūlādiśākādikṣetrameva ca ..

pañcāmravapanaṁ puṣpodyānaṁ vṛkṣādiropaṇam .

savaṭāśvatthatulasīdhātrīvilvādiropaṇam ..

nityaṁ naimittikaṁ kāmyaṁ snānasandhyādikaṁ tathā .

pañcayajñaṁ tatheṣṭārcādikametattu cāparam ..

śrīkṛṣṇasevanaṁ bhaktabhaktiṣoḍaśapūrbakam .

kā kathā vetareṣāntu na kuryāt pāramārthikaḥ ..

yaḥ karmaphalakāmepsurna karotyatra karma ca .

kurute mattatāmohādajñānādvā bhramāditaḥ .

nṛpate ! kurvatāmetat sarvaṁ syānniṣphalaṁ dhruvam ..

yadbhū mirathavā tasya saṁpūrṇaṁ phalameva ca .

ato loke hi dharmātmā jñānī ca sarvadharmavit ..

vivekī dharmaśāstrajñaḥ purāṇāgamavedavit .

vedāntajño muniḥ sādhuḥ kārṣṇādirvā mahīpate ! .

na kuryādbhū miharaṇaṁ brāhmaṇīharakalmaṣam .. iti

pādmottarakhaṇḍe 49 adhyāyaḥ .. * .. api ca . bṛhaspatiḥ .

ṣaṣṭiṁ varṣasahasrāṇi svarge tiṣṭhati bhūmidaḥ .

ucchettā cānumantā ca tāvanti narake vaset ..

tathā .

bhūmiṁ dattvā tu yaḥ patraṁ kuryāccandrārkakālikam .

anācchedyamanāhāryaṁ dānalekhyantu tadbiduḥ ..

mahābhārate .

api pāpakṛto rājñaḥ pratigṛhṇanti sādhavaḥ .

pṛthivīṁ nānyadicchanti pāvanīṁ jananīṁ yathā ..

nāmāsyāḥ priyadatteti guhyaṁ devyāḥ sanātanam .

dāne vāpyathavādāne nāmāsyāḥ paramaṁ priyam .. dānādānakāle yat

priyadattā nāmāsyāḥ paramaṁ priyamityuktaṁ tena

priyadattāmityuccārya dātavyā pratigrahītavyā ca . bhūmeḥ pūjāyāṁ

dānavākye ca priyadatteti viśeṣaṇam . bhūmirviṣṇudevatākā .

ṣaṣṭivarṣasahasrāvacchinnasvargavāsaḥ phalam . pratigrahe tadbhūmeḥ

pradakṣiṇamātram . bhūmerasannidhāne tāmuddiśya pradakṣiṇam . iti

śuddhitattvam .. * .. ārdrādyapādage ravau bhūmī rajoyuktā bhavati

tatkāle pāṭhādiniṣedho yathā jyotiṣe .

rajoyuk kṣmāmbu vācī ca raudrādyapādage ravau .

tasyāṁ pāṭho bījavāpo nāhibhīrdugdhapānataḥ ..

rajoyuk kṣmā ṛtumatī pṛthvī . jyotiṣe .

yasmin vāre sahasrāṁśuryatkāle mithunaṁ vrajet .

ambu vācī bhavennityaṁ punastatkālavārayoḥ .. matsyasūkte .

dharaṇyāmṛtumatyāñca bhūmikampe tathaiva ca .

antarāgamane caiva vidyāṁ naiva paṭhedbudhaḥ .. iti tithyāditattvam

.. * ..

na svādhyāyaṁ vaṣaṭkāraṁ na devapitṛpūjanam .

halānāṁ yojanañcaiva bījānāṁ vapanaṁ tathā .

dinatrayaṁ na kurvīta yāvat pṛthvī rajasvalā ..

yatino vratinaścaiva vidhavā ca dbijastathā .

ambuvācīdinenaiva pākaṁ kṛtvā na bhakṣayet ..

svapākaṁ parapākaṁ vā ambuvācīdine tathā .

bhakṣaṇaṁ naiva kurvīta cāṇḍālānnasamaṁ smṛtam .. iti

rājamārtaṇḍaḥ .. aśuddhāṁ bhūmimāha devalaḥ . sā amedhyā malinā

duṣṭā etattritayānyatamā bhavati . atrāmedhyā yathā —

prasūte garbhiṇī yatra mriyate yatra mānuṣaḥ .

cāṇḍālairuṣitaṁ yatra yatra vinyasyate śavaḥ ..

viṇmūtropahataṁ yattu kuṇapo yatra dṛśyate .

evaṁ kaśmalabhūyiṣṭhā bhūramedhyeti lakṣyate .. kuṇapaḥ śavaḥ .

duṣṭā yathā —

kṛmikīṭapadakṣepairdūṣitā yatra medinī .

drapsāpakarṣarṇeḥ kṣiptairvāntaiśca duṣṭatāṁ vrajet .. drapsā

ghanībhūtaśleṣmā . malinā yathā —

nakhadantatanūjatvaktuṣapāṁśurajomalaiḥ . bhasmapaṅkatṛṇairvāpi

pracchannā malinā bhavet .. tāsāñca śuddhimāha .

dahanaṁ khananaṁ bhūmerupalepanavāpane .

paryanyavarṣaṇañcaiva śaucaṁ pañcavidhaṁ smṛtam .. vāpanaṁ

mṛdantareṇa pūraṇam . atrāmedhyāyāścatuṣkaṁ pañcakaṁ vā . duṣṭāyāḥ

dvikaṁ trikaṁ vā . malināyāḥ dahanādīnāmekadhā śodhanamāha devalaḥ

.

pañcadhā vā caturdhā vā bhūramedhyā viśudhyati .

dvidhā duṣṭā tridhā vāpi śudhyate malinaikadhā ..

anyapañcaprakāramāha manuḥ .

sammārjanenāñjanena sekenollekhanena ca .

gavāñca parivāsena bhūmiḥ śuddhyati pañcadhā .. sammārjanaṁ

tṛṇādyapanayanam . añjanaṁ gomayenopalepanam . seko jalena

prakṣālanam . ullikhanaṁ takṣaṇam . parivāso gavopasthāpanam atra

sekaparivāsayornirlepasthāpanaviṣayatvam

anyeṣāmamedhyaliptaviṣayatvam . brahmapurāṇe .

grāmāddaṇḍaśataṁ tyaktvā nagarācca caturguṇam .

bhūmeḥ sarvatra śuddhiḥ syādyatra loko na vidyate .. daṇḍaṁ

caturhastaḥ . nagaraṁ mahāgrāmaḥ . iti

gopālapañcānanakṛtaśuddhinirṇayaḥ .. * .. bhūmau

varṇalesvanādiniṣedho yathā —

na bhūbhau vilikhedvarṇaṁ mantraṁ na pustake likhet .

na muktvā pustakaṁ sthāpyaṁ na muktamāharettu tat ..

bhūkampe grahaṇe caiva akṣaraṁ vātha pustakam .

bhūmau tiṣṭhati deveśi ! janmajanmasu mūrkhatā .

tadā bhavati deveśi ! tasmāttat parivarjayet .. iti yoginītantre

tṛtīyabhāge 7 paṭalaḥ ..

मही — mahī Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899mahī f. (cf. 2. «mah»), «the great world», the earth (cf. «urvī, pṛthivī»)

&c. &c. (in later language also = ground, soil, land, country)

f. earth (as a substance)

f. the base of a triangle or other plane figure

f. space

f. a host, army

f. a cow ( ii, 11)

mahī du. heaven and earth ( iii, 30)

mahī pl. waters, streams

f. Hingtsha Repens

f. a kind of metre

f. N. of a divine being (associated with Iḍā and Sarasvatī ; cf.

f. of a river

f. of the number «one»

mahī in comp. for «maha».

mahī «mahī-kampa» &c. see p.803, col.2.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

mahī 1 Earth; as in mahīpāla, mahībhṛt &c.; mahī ramyā śayyā Bh. 3. 79.

(2) Ground, soil.

(3) Landed property or estate, land.

(4) A country, kingdom.

(5) N. of a river falling into the gulf of Cambay.

(6) (In geom.) The base of any plane figure.

(7) A large army (Ved.).

— Comp.

—inaḥ, —īśvaraḥ a king; na na mahīnanahīnaparākramaṁ R. 9. 5.

—kaṁpaḥ an earthquake.

—kṣitu m. a king, sovereign; R. 1. 11, 85; 19. 20.

—jaḥ 1. the planet Mars. —2. N. of Nara kāsura. —3. a tree. (

—jā) N. of Sītā. (

—jaṁ) wet ginger.

—talaṁ surface of the earth.

—durgaṁ an earth fort.

—dharaḥ 1. a mountain; R. 6. 52; Ku. 6. 89. —2. an epithet of

Viṣṇu.

—bhraḥ 1. a mountain; Bh. 2. 10; Śi. 15. 54; R. 3. 60, 13. 7. —2. a

symbolical expression for the number, ‘seven’. —3. an epithet of Viṣṇu.

—nāthaḥ, —paḥ, —patiḥ, —pālaḥ, —bhuj m.

—maghavan m,

—maheṁdraḥ a king; Bg. 1. 2; R. 2. 34, 6. 12.

—patanaṁ humble obeisance (as by falling on the ground.)

—putraḥ, —sutaḥ, —sūnuḥ 1. the planet Mars. —2. epithets of the

demon Naraka.

—putrī, —sutā an epithet of Sītā.

—prakaṁpaḥ an earthquake.

—prarohaḥ, —ruh m., ruhaḥ a tree; Ki. 5. 10; Śi. 20 49.

—prācīraṁ, —prāvaraḥ the sea.

—bhartṛ m. a king.

—bhṛt m. 1. a mountain; Ki. 1. 27; Ki. 5. 1. —2. a king, sovereign.

—latā an earthworm.

—suraḥ a Brāhmaṇa.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

mahī s. u. 3. mah.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

mahī mahī, see maha.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

mahī -> mah2.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

mahī mah-ī, f. (of mah) earth; ground, soil (also pl.); land; country,

kingdom; earth (substance); base (of a geometrical figure); space (RV.);

host (RV.); cow (V.): du. heaven and earth (V.); pl. waters, streams

(RV.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

mahī strī, (mahyate iti . mah + ac . maha + gaurādibhyaśca . 4 . 1 . 41 .

iti ṅīṣ . yadvā, mahi . kṛdikārāditi ṅīṣ .) pṛthivī . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 1 . 3 .

(yathā viṣṇupurāṇe . 1 . 4 . 29 .

uttiṣṭhatastasya jalārdrakukṣe rmahāvarāhasya mahīṁ vidhārya .

vidhunvato vedamayaṁ śarīraṁ romāntarasthā munayo juṣanti ..)

nadīviśeṣaḥ . sā ca mālavadeśe vartate . iti medinī . he, . 7 .. tajjalaguṇāḥ

.

mahījalantu susvādu balyaṁ pittaharaṁ guru . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ ..

gauḥ . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. hilamocikā . iti trikāṇḍaśeṣaḥ .. (lokaḥ . yathā,

ṛgvede . 3 . 56 . 2 .

tisro mahīruparāstasthuḥ .. mahīḥ lokāḥ . iti tadbhāṣye sāyanaḥ ..)

रूप — rūpa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899rūpa n. (perhaps connected with «varpa, varpas»; ifc. f. «ā», rarely «ī»)

any outward appearance or phenomenon or colour (often pl.), form,

shape, figure &c. &c. («rūpeṇa» ifc. in the form of; «rūpam-kṛ» or «bhū»,

to assume a form; often ifc. = «having the form or appearance or colour

of», «formed or composed of», «consisting of», «like to»; sometimes used

after an adj. or p.p. to emphasize its meaning or almost redundantly cf.

«ghora-r-«; or connected with a verb e.g. «pacati-rūpam», he cooks very

well cf.

n. dreamy or phantom shapes (pl.)

n. handsome form, loveliness, grace, beauty, splendour &c. &c.

n. nature, character, peculiarity, feature, mark, sign, symptom &c.

&c.

n. likeness, image, reflection

n. circumstances (opp. to «time» and «place»)

n. sort, kind

n. mode, manner, way

rūpa n. (ifc.) trace of.

n. a single specimen or exemplar (and therefore a term for the

number «one»)

n. a partic. coin (prob. a rupee)

n. a show, play, drama

rūpa n. (in alg.) the arithmetical unit

rūpa n. (pl.) integer number

n. known or absolute number, a known quantity as having specific

form (and expressed by «rū» i.e. first syllable of «rūpa») 182

rūpa n. (in gram.) any form of a noun or verb (as inflected by declension

or conjugation)

rūpa n. (in phil.) the quality of colour (one of the 17 or 24 Guṇas of the

Vaiśeṣikas) 68

rūpa n. (with Buddhists) material form i.e. the organized body (as one of

the 5 constituent elements or Skandhas) 22 109

rūpa n. (in dram.) a reflection or remark made under partic.

circumstances when the action is at its height («garbhe») &c.

rūpa n. (only cattle

n. a beast

n. a sound, word

n. rereading a book (= «granthāvṛtti»)

rūpa m. a word of unknown meaning

rūpa m. (pl.) N. of a people

rūpa m. or n. N. of a place (v.l. «rūma»)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

rūpa UṆĀDIS. 3, 28. 1) n. SIDDH.K.249, «a», 11. am Ende eines adj.

comp. f. ā; ī PAÑCAR. 2, 6, 23 wohl fehlerhaft. a) «äussere Erscheinung»,

sowohl «Farbe» (namentlich pl.) als «Gestalt, Form» AK. 1, 1, 4, 16. 7, 38.

TRIK. 3, 3, 278. H. 1376. an. 2, 298. fg. MED. p. 9. fg. HALĀY. 5, 79.

VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3, 28. rūpaṁ rūpaṁ maghavā bobhavīti

māyāḥ kṛṇvānastanvaṁ1 pari svām ṚV. 3, 53, 8. 6, 47, 18. ghoṣā idasya

śṛṇvire na rūpam 10, 168, 4. nabho na rūpamaruṣaṁ vasānāḥ 7, 97, 6.

rūpā haritā 10, 96, 3. kṛṣṇā, arjunā 21, 3. viśvā rūpāṇi haritā kṛṇoṣi AV. 6,

20, 3. viśvā rūpāṇyāviśan ṚV. 7, 55, 1. 8, 15, 13. 5, 81, 2. 10, 136, 4. 139,

3. 169, 3. pitā yatsīmabhi rūpairavāsayat 1, 160, 2. ā nāmabhirmaruto

vakṣi viśvānā rūpebhiḥ 5, 43, 10. rūpairapiṁśadbhuvanāni viśvā 10, 110,

9. 184, 1. divi rūpamāsajat «hat dem Himmel seine Farbe gegeben» 124,

7. tvaṣṭā rūpeva takṣyā 8, 91, 8. tvaṣṭā rūpāṇāmīśe TBR. 1, 4, 7, 1. AV. 1,

22, 3. nāma rūpaṁ ca 11, 7, 1. BHĀG. P. 1, 5, 14. 8, 38. rūpa, nāman,

karman ŚAT. BR. 14, 4, 4, 1. 11, 2, 3, 3. dve rūpe kṛṇute rocamānaḥ AV.

13, 2, 28. udyanraśmīnā tanoṣi viśvā rūpāṇi puṣyasi 10. vahyaṁ viśvā

rūpāṇi bibhratam 14, 2, 30. upabarhaṇaṁ dadāti rūpāṇāmavaruddhyai

«Farben» TBR. 1, 1, 6, 10. ye rūpāṇi pratimuñcamānā asurāḥ santaḥ

svadhayā caranti «Spukgestalten» VS. 2, 30. «Traumgestalten» ŚAT. BR.

14, 7, 1, 14. catvāri cakṣuṣo rūpāṇi dve śukle dve kṛṣṇe «Farben» TS. 5, 3,

1, 4. ātmarūpe 6, 1, 6, 1. jyotiḥ paśyati rūpāṇi rūpaṁ ca bahudhā

smṛtam. hrasvo dīrghastathā sthūlaścaturasro ‘nuvṛttavān (ṇuvṛttavān

ed. Bomb.) .. śuklaḥ kṛṣṇastathā rakto nīlaḥ pīto ‘ruṇastathā.

kaṭhinaścikkaṇaḥ ślakṣṇaḥ picchilo mṛdudāruṇaḥ.. evaṁ ṣoḍaśavistāro

jyotīrūpaguṇaḥ smṛtaḥ. MBH. 12,6853. fgg. M.1,77. 12,98. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

104,b,30. 225,a, No. 549. 226,a, No. 554. RĀJA-TAR.5,375. BHĀG.

P.2,2,29. BHĀṢĀP. 2. 99. einer der fünf Skandha bei den Buddhisten

BURN. Intr. 511. H. 233. Sch. dhūmra- «Farbe» MBH. 7, 9621 = 13, 7510.

nararūpeṇa «in der Gestalt eines Mannes» M. 7, 8. R. 3, 52, 14. Spr. 2525.

3271. BHĀG. P. 1, 7, 45. arthamanartharūpeṇa sā dadarśa R. GORR. 2, 8,

33. naitā (striyaḥ) rūpaṁ parīkṣante «das Aeussere eines Menschen» Spr.

1647. -viparyaya M. 11, 48. tasya daṣṭasya tadrūpaṁ

kṣipramantaradhīyata MBH. 3, 2619. 2621. 2804. rūpeṇa vikṛtaḥ R. 1, 1,

54. nahīdṛśaṁ tāpasānāṁ rūpaṁ bhavati karhicit 9, 45. 56, 17. 2, 42, 12.

ŚĀK. 115. VIKR. 9. mamedamiti yo brūyātso ‘nuyojyo yathāvidhi.

saṁvādya rūpasaṁkhyādīnsvāmī taddravyamarhati.. «das Aussehen eines

Gegenstandes» M. 8, 31. fg. deśasya R. 2, 93, 6. rūpaṁ kar «eine Gestalt

annehmen, sich verwandeln in», mit eigenthümlicher Construction in der

älteren Sprache: aśvaḥ śveto rūpaṁ kṛtvā «sich in ein weisses Ross

verwandelnd» AIT. BR. 6, 35. ākhū rūpaṁ kṛtvā TBR. 1, 1, 3, 3. TS. 5, 2,

6, 5. 6, 1, 3, 1. āśvaṁ rūpaṁ kṛtvā NIR. 12, 10. mṛgavihaṁgānāṁ kasya

rūpaṁ karomyaham R. 5, 35, 29. strīrūpamadbhutaṁ kṛtvā MBH. 1, 1156.

KATHĀS. 13, 143. 39, 175. nalarūpamakāri taiḥ 56, 269. sa hi rūpāṇi

kurute vividhāni MBH. 13, 2270. kṛtvā rūpāṇyanekaśaḥ R. 1, 28, 18.

rūpaṁ bahurūpaṁ kṛtvā 64, 7. 8. 5, 31, 28. MBH. 3, 2557. ātmanaḥ

paramaṁ rūpaṁ cākaronmanmathākṛti BRAHMA-P. in LA. (III) 53, 22.

svaṁ caiva rūpaṁ kurvantu «die eigene Gestalt annehmen» MBH. 3, 2211.

2839. asyaiva sarve rūpaṁ bhavāma «seine Gestalt annehmen» ŚAT. BR.

14, 4, 3, 32. bhīmarūpaṁ samāsthitaḥ R. 5, 50, 18. rūpaṁ śūrpaṇakhā

nāmnā sadṛśaṁ pratyapadyata RAGH. 12, 38. rūpamanyatsa śiśriye

KATHĀS. 18, 243. «Lautform, Form» eines Wortes: svaṁ rūpaṁ śabdasya

P. 1, 1, 68. sarvādīni śabdarūpāṇi Schol. zu P. 1, 1, 27. debheti

rūpāntaraṁ bodhyam SIDDH.K. zu P.1,2,6. kimo rūpam VOP. 25, 5. Am

Ende eines adj. comp. yajñāya dhṛtarūpāya «der eine Gestalt

angenommen hatte» BHĀG. P. 3, 19, 3. «ein — Aeusseres habend, die

Gestalt von — habend, in der Gestalt von — auftretend, das Aussehen von —

habend, dem ähnlich» H. 1462. manojñarūpā «ein angenehmes Aeusseres

habend» R. 1, 9, 52. samakṣa- ŚĀK. 190. anācāra- «von ungewöhnlichem

Aussehen» KAUŚ. 117. veśyā munirūpāḥ «Buhldirnen in der Gestalt von»

Muni R. 1, 8, 23. mātṛrūṣe mamāmitre voc. 2, 74, 7. padmārūpā śrīḥ

MBH. 3, 14404. brāhmaṇīrūpā KATHĀS. 16, 10. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 35. BHĀG.

P. 1, 19, 14. 5, 26, 20. PAÑCAT. 258, 23. taṁ ha trīngirirūpānavijñātāniva

darśayāṁ cakāra «er zeigte ihm drei unbekannte bergähnliche

Gegenstände» TBR. 3, 10, 11, 4. plavarūpamapi kiṁcit «etwas

flossähnliches» ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 12, 6. KAUŚ. 53. nadī- 71. agni- R. 1, 65,

15. anala-, ketu- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 3. aśoka- «die Farbe des» Aśoka

«habend» 37, 2. 54, 110. sa eva śabdastadrūpo vāsasāṁ nijyatāmiva «ein

Laut, ähnlich dem von Kleidern, die gewaschen werden», MBH. 7, 8531.

mṛgatṛṣṇi- BHĀG. P. 7, 9. 25. dārūṣā dhārūpāśca dhātavaḥ «Wurzeln von

der Lautform» dā «und» dhā Schol. zu P. 1, 1, 20. ajrūpo nipātaḥ «ein aus

einem blossen Vocal bestehender» Nip. zu 14. tasyājñā hiṁsāviratirūpā

«ein in der Form von — auftretender Befehl» so v. a. «der Befehl, der darin

bestand, dass man» — RĀJA-TAR. 3, 80. māyayā nāmarūpayā

«erscheinend als» BHĀG. P. 8, 14, 10. asya sphuraṇasya phalaṁ

priyāliṅganarūpam «bestehend in» Schol. zu ŚĀK. 15. rājño

‘bhilāṣarūpeyaṁ prathamakāmāvasthā zu 22. 26. 81, 4. vadhadaṇḍaṁ

tāḍanādyaṅgācchedarūpam KULL. zu M. 8, 129. sīmārūpeṣu

grāmasaṁdhiṣu zu 261. munerapatyaṁ śakuntalārūpam so v. a. «nämlich

—, das ist» Śak. Schol. zu ŚĀK. 41. Häufig in Zusammensetzung mit einem

adj. oder partic., wobei nicht selten rūpa als ganz überflüssig erscheint:

ghora- «ein imposantes Aussehen habend» M. 7, 121. ārya- 10, 57.

kruddho ‘pyakruddharūpaḥ MBH. 1, 5596. unmattarūpā 3, 2514. preta-

HARIV. 4549. virūparūpa MBH. 1, 5931. MĀRK. P. 69, 30.

ākārādīndīrgharūpān = dīrghān ṚV. PRĀT. Einl. śānta- Spr. 1114.

rūkṣarūpā (vāc) 4698. vācaḥ pathyarūpāḥ MBH. 2, 2196. fg. satya-,

(vākya) R. 2, 57, 21. ghorarūpāṇi nimittāni BHĀG. P. 1, 14, 2.

aśraddhāna- MBH. 13. 1130. paramārta- 2, 2250. prahṛṣṭa- 3, 15654.

hṛṣṭa- 5, 7519. trastarūpaṁ tu vijñāya jagatsarvam R. 1, 23, 5.

adṛṣṭarūpā (latā) «bisher unbekannt» 2, 55, 29. saṁpanna- «lecker» 5, 14,

45. nikhātarūpāṁ gaṇeśapratimām KATHĀS. 71, 60. nānyadanyena

saṁsṛṣṭarūpaṁ (saṁsṛṣṭaṁ rūpaṁ ed. LOIS.) vikrayamarhati M. 8, 203.

rāgādinā sthāpitarūpam (sthagitarūpam bei LOIS.) KULL. zu M. 8, 203.

vimṛṣṭa BURN. Intr. 49. kānta- ad ŚĀK. 19. śakya- (so ist zu lesen und

demnach zu übersetzen) Spr. 4908. agamyarūpā pṛthivī MBH. 9, 722.

sakaruṇā hi guravo garbharūpeṣu (= bālakeṣu Comm.) UTTARAR. 124, 8

(168, 3). ānanda- so v. a. «von Wonne erfüllt» PRAŚNOP. 2, 10. Nach P. 5,

3, 66 (vgl. jedoch Vārtt.) und VOP. 7, 50 soll rūpa als tonloses Suffix den

vorangehenden Begriff lobend hervorheben: paṭu- «recht geschickt»,

pacatirūpam «er kocht gut», vaiyākaraṇarūpaḥ «ein ordentlicher

Grammatiker» Schol.; vgl. P. 8, 1, 57. Verhalten eines fem. vor einem

solchen rūpa P. 6, 3, 35. 43. fgg. VOP. 7, 49. — b) «Bild, Bildniss»: na

codake nirīkṣeta svaṁ rūpam M. 4, 38. likhitaṁ paṭe. rūpaṁ

sundarasenasya KATHĀS. 101, 101. sthāpayeddaśa rūpāṇi WEBER,

KṚṢṆAJ. 284. — c) «eine schöne Gestalt, Schönheit» TRIK. H. an. MED.

VIŚVA a. a. O. nabho na rūpaṁ jarimā mināti ṚV. 1, 71, 10. 2, 13, 3. 9,

65, 18. paśūnām (nach Comm.) VS. 39, 4. TS. 7, 8, 25, 1. ŚAT. BR. 9, 4,

1, 4. yoṣiti rūpaṁ dadhāti 13, 1, 9, 6. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 5, 3. —

sattvaguṇopeta M. 3, 40. varṇarūpopasaṁpanna 4, 68. -dravyavihīna 141.

-guṇānvitā 7, 77. vayorūpasamanvita 8, 182. YĀJÑ. 1, 290. MBH. 3, 2081.

-saṁpannā 2084. R. 1, 4, 27. MBH. 3, 2124. 2357. 5, 7010. R. 1, 6, 13.

ŚĀK. 13, 10. 42. rūpaṁ jarā hanti Spr. 2636. -yauvanasaṁpanna 2637.

rūpābhijanasaṁpanna 2638. apratima 2639. vidyā nāma narasya

rūpamadhikam 2797. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 78, 13. 105, 5. rūpopeta 15, 26.

kularūpānurūpā bhāryā KATHĀS. 11, 6. -yauvanagarvitā BRAHMA-P. in

LA. (III) 50, 4. -samanvita WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 274. rūpāḍhyā VET. in LA.

(III) 1, 14. paramādbhutarūpā KATHĀS. 18, 85. — d) «Naturerscheinung,

Erscheinung, Symptom» VARĀH. BṚH. S.3,9.5,16. 21,35. 37. 32,8. 12. 20.

43,27. SUŚR.2,55,21. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 305,b,17. 312,a, No. 745.

«Anzeichen»: jayasyaitadbhāvino rūpamāhuḥ MBH. 12, 3760. fg.

«Abzeichen, charakteristisches Zeichen, Eigenthümlichkeit,

Repräsentation, Symbol» BHĀG. P. 3, 7, 29. dīkṣāyai rūpaṁ śaṣpāṇi VS.

19, 13. 31. aśvarathaḥ kṣatrasya rūpam AIT. BR. 4, 9. yatsurā bhavati

kṣatrarūpaṁ tat 8, 8. 1. 2. 2, 23. 3, 29. 32. 4, 26. 5, 1. 4. TBR. 2, 1, 4, 9.

sarvāsāṁ devatānām TS. 3, 5, 9, 1. ŚAT. BR. 1, 5, 3, 12. 6, 3, 41. 13, 1,

5, 1. iṣṭi- 1, 6, 2, 12. KĀTY. ŚR. 14, 7, 3. yadvṛṣṭa oṣadhaya udyanti

prāṇinaśca pṛthivyāṁ tadaśvino rūpam so v. a. «das ist die Sache der»

Aśvin NIR. 6, 36. bodhaścāvagatiścaiva smṛtirvijñānameva ca. ityetānīha

rūpāṇi tasya rūpasya bhāsvataḥ.. «Erscheinungsform» MĀRK. P. 101, 19.

pañca rūpāṇi rājāno dhārayantyamitaujasaḥ. agnerindrasya somasya

yamasya varuṇasya ca.. «Natur» Spr. 4486. yāvadahametacchabdarūpaṁ

jñātvāgacchāmi PAÑCAT. 21, 25. deśaṁ rūpaṁ ca kālaṁ ca «Umstände»

M. 8, 45. somo rūpaviśeṣairoṣadhiścandramā vā NIR. 11, 5. -saṁpanna

«modificirt» 1, 15. vṛttyā lakṣaṇarūpayā BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 14. rūpaiḥ

saptabhiḥ «auf sieben Arten» KAP. 3, 73. SĀṁKHYAK. 63. 65. rūpabhedāt

«je nach der Art, wie es sich äussert», WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 223. ariṣṭarūpāṇi

«Arten» SUŚR. 1, 119, 7. bahūni vighnarūpāṇi kariṣyanti ca rākṣasāḥ R. 6,

82, 57. yāvattu niryatastasya rajorūpamadṛśyata so v. a. «eine Spur von

Staub» R. SCHL. 2, 42, 1. — e) «ein einzelnes Stück, Exemplar»:

sārdhāstisro guñjāḥ saptatimūlyaṁ dhṛtaṁ rūpam von einer Perle

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 81, 11. daher Bez. «der Zahl Eins» SIDDHĀNTAŚIR.

GAṆIT. BHAGRAHAJUTJADH. 4. WEBER, JYOT. 77. fg. Ind. St.8,444. fgg.

Verz. d. Oxf. H. 188,b,13. sg. «the arithmetical unit», pl. «integer number»

COLEBR. Alg. 17. 149. «absolute number» 139. -vibhāga 6. 10. —

bhāgānubandha, -bhāgāpavāha 15. — f) «eine best. Münze», wohl «eine

Rupie», = nāṇaka H. an. VIŚVA a. a. O. st. dessen fälschlich mānaka

TRIK., nāloka MED. — VARĀH. BṚH. S. 81, 14. P. 1, 4, 52, Vārtt. 4, Sch.

rūpārdhaka «eine halbe Rupie» H. an. 2, 39. MED. g. 13. — g) in der

Dramatik «eine in der Katastase» (garbha) «angestellte Betrachtung»

BHAR. NĀṬYAŚ. 19,83. DAŚAR.1,36. SĀH. D. 365. 367. PRATĀPAR.

21,b,8. — h) «Schaustück, Schauspiel» TRIK. H. an. MED. DAŚAR. 1, 7. —

Die Lexicographen kennen noch folgende Bedd. — i) «Vieh, Viehheerde»

TRIK. H. an. MED. VIŚVA. = mṛga HALĀY. 5, 30. — k) = śabda «Laut,

Wort» TRIK. H. an. VIŚVA. — l) «ein» Śloka H. an. MED. — m) =

granthāvṛtti TRIK. H. an. MED. «acquiring familiarity with any book or

authority by frequent perusal, learning by heart or rote» WILSON; eher

«Citat.» — 2) m. N. pr. eines Mannes WILSON, Sel. Works I,154. 157. fg.

167. fg. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 145,a, No. 305. 532,b. — 3) f. ā N. pr. eines

Flusses VP. 185, N. 80. — 4) m. oder n. N. pr. einer Oertlichkeit Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 339,a,12. rūma v. l. — Vgl. a-, ati-, aneka-, anya-, asāra-, evaṁ-,

kāma-, kiṁ-, ku-, jāta-, tathā-, tapta-, tri-, daśa-, deśa-, naṣṭa-, nānā-,

nī-, naika-, padma-, para-, piśaṅga-, puṁ-, puru- (auch BHĀG. P. 4, 24,

61), puruṣa-, pūrva-, pṛthagrūpa, prati-, prāpta-, priya-, bahu-, bāla-,

bṛhadrūpa, bhadrarūpā, bhārūpa, bhāva-, bhūta-, mahā-, yukta-, vi-,

viśva-, sa-, su-, sva-.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

rūpa rūpa (probably from rūp, an old form of rop, in ropaya, the Caus. of

ruh), n.

1. Natural state or condition.

2. State, Pañc. 137, 19.

3. Form, Vikr. d. 9; figure, Chr. 17, 28; kind, Pañc. 21. 25.

4. Appearance.

5. An image.

6. Beauty, Pañc. iii. d. 239.

7. Colour, Bhāṣāp. 2. 99.

8. A play, a dramatic poem.

— Comp. a-, adj., f. pā, disfigured, Rām. 2, 23, 43. ati-,

I. n. beauty, Lass. 37, 5.

II. adj. beautiful, Rām. 3, 23, 16. anya-,

I. n. another shape, Kathās. 13, 172.

II. adj., f. pā, having another shape, Kathās. 12, 195. an-eka-, adj., f. pā,

having manifold forms, Hit. ii. d. 174. aśra-, adj. having the shape of a

horse, Pañc. 258, 23. kāma-,

I. n. a shape changing as one lists, MBh. 1, 6077.

II. adj., f. pā, taking any or every shape at will, Megh. 6.

III. m. sing. and pl. the name of a country, Ragh. 4, 83. kiṁrūpa, i. e.

kim-, adj. of what shape, Pañc. 258, 13. See ku-, Jāta- (vb. jan),

I. n. gold, Nal. 1, 19.

II. adj. golden, MBh. 14, 190. tathā-, adj., f. pā, having such a shape,

Pañc. 44, 20. garbha-, adj. child-like, Utt. Rāmac. 168, 3. deśa-, n.

suitableness, MBh. 12, 3961. naṣṭa-, adj. disappeared, MBh. 3, 2604.

nānā-,

I. n. pl. many shapes, Rām. 3, 1, 21 Gorr.

II. adj. having many shapes, different, Man. 9, 38. padma-, adj., f. pā,

having the colour of a lotus, MBh. 3, 14404. puṁrūpa, i. e. puṁs-, n. the

shape of a man, Kathās. 39, 175. pūrva-,

I. n. symptom of occurring discase, Suśr. 1, 127, 12.

II. adj., f. pā, having its former shape, Lass. 72, 13. prāpta-, adj. 1.

handsome. 2. learned, wise. 3. suitable, Daśak. in Chr. 198, 5. bharya-,

adj., f. pā, good, Rām. 3, 52, 14. yukta-, adj. suitable, Śāk. d. 12. vi-,

I. adj. 1. deformed, Pañc. i. d. 159. 2. unusual. 3. wicked, Pañc. 213, 23.

II. n. 1. difference of nature. 2. deformity, Cāṇ. 73 in Berl. Monatsb. 1864,

411; monstrous shape.

III. f. pā, the wife of Yama. viśva-,

I. adj. taking all forms, omnipresent.

II. m. Viṣṇu. sa-, adj. like, resembling. saṁkalpa-, adj. conformable to

one’s wish. sva-,

I. n. 1. one’s own shape, Chr. 62, 51. 2. natural condition, nature, Pañc.

145, 16. 3. natural and obvious purpose. 4. kind.

II. adj. 1. of like character, Vedāntas. in Chr. 217, 5. 2. like, similar,

suitable, Lass. 35, 12. 3. pleasing, Lass. 20, 11. 4. wise. ātmasrarūpa, i.

e. ātman-sva-, adj. true (just as it happenel), Pañc. 43, 12. stri-sva-, adj.

having the body of a female, Chr. 61, 45. hṛṣṭa-, adj., f. pā, having the

hair of the body creet with pleasure, Chr. 60, 33.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

rūpa n. (adj. —° f. ā, r. ī) outward appearance, colour, form, shape (often

—° adj. -coloured or -shaped, -like, consisting of or in—), the right form

i.e. beauty; nature, character, mark, peculiarity; circumstances; drama,

play (cf. daśarūpa). — Abstr. -tā f., -tva n.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

rūpa rūpa, n. appearance, colour (esp. pl.), form, shape; dream or

phantom shapes (pl.; V.); likeness, image, reflexion; grammatical form,

derivative; handsome form, beauty, comeliness; phenomenon; sign,

indication, token, symbol, manifestation; characteristic, property, nature;

circumstances (opp. time or place) sort, kind; trace of (-°); single

specimen; drama; -° a. having a (beautiful etc.) form; having the from,

appearance, or colour of, resembling; formed or consisting of, in the form

of, that is to say; often -° w. an a. or pp. emphasizing its mg., but

frequently also pleonastic: in. rupeṇa, in the form of (-°);

-ṁ kṛ, assume a form; — the form of (nm., g., a., or -°).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

rūpa t ka tatkṛtau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (adanta curā°-para°-saka°-seṭ

.) tatkṛtī rūpakaraṇam . arurūpat pratimāṁ śilpī . pratimāyā rūpaṁ

karotītyarthaḥ . nipūrvaḥ svarūpakathane . anumānaṁ nirūpyata

ityanumānakhaṇḍam . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

rūpa rūpānvitakaraṇe curā° ubha° saka° seṭ . rūpayati te arurūpat ta . ni

+ pramāṇopanyāsena svarūpādikathane .

rūpa na° rūpa—ka bhāve ac vā . 1 svabhāva, 2 saundarye, 3 paśau, 4

nāmni, 5 śabde, 6 granthāvṛttau, 7 dṛśyakāvye nāṭakādau 8 śloke 9 ākāre

ca medi° . śabdadhātūnāṁ vibhaktiyogena 10 niṣpannaśabde, 11

śuklādivarṇe ca 12 tadgati tri° . uttarapadasthaḥ sadṛśārthe tri° yathā

pitrarūpastanaya mātṛrūpā kanyā . 13 ekasaṁkhyānvite na° rūpaṁ bhajet

syāt paripūrtikālaḥ līlāvatī . ekāvyaktaṁ śodhayedanyapakṣāt

rūpāṇyanyasyetarasmācca pakṣāditi vaujagaṇitokte 14

avyaktarāśisahacaritavyaktasaṁkhyānvite ca . ākāravarṇarūparūpasya

ṣoḍaśa bhedāḥ tatra parimāṇakṛtā rūpākārasya

hrasvadīrghathaturasvavṛtteti pañca bhedāḥ . varṇasya graklakṛṣṇa

nīlāruṇaraktaṣīteti pañca bhedāḥ sparśakṛtā ākārabhedāḥ

kaṭhinacikkaṇaślakṣṇapiṅgalamṛdudāraṇeti pañca bhadāḥ iti ṣoḍaśavidhā

bhā° śā° uktāḥ . vaiśevikanaye cakṣurgrāhyaṁ tavedrūpaṁ

dravyāderupalambhakam . cakṣuṣaḥ mahakāri syāt śuklādikamanekadhā

bhāṣā° . tacca udbhūtānudbhūtabhedena dvividham udbhūtarūpaṁ

nayanasya gocaraḥ bhāgokteḥ udbhūtarūpasyaiva pratyakṣaviṣayatā na

paramāṇugatānudbhūtasya . tacca pṛthivyaptejasāṁ guṇaḥ

rūpadravatvapratyakṣayogi syāt prathamaṁ trikama bhāṣā° ukteḥ .

saundaryarūpalakṣaṇamujjvalamaṇinoktaṁ yathā aṅgāndhabhūṣitāntheva

kenacit bhūṣaṇādinā . yena bhūṣitavadbhānti tadūpamiti kathyate .

रूपम् — rūpam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

rūpam [rūp-ka bhāve ac vā]

(1) Form, figure, appearance; virūpaṁ rūpavaṁtaṁ vā pumānityeva

bhuṁjate Pt. 1. 143; so surūpa, kurūpa.

(2) Form or the quality of colour (one of the 24 guṇas of the

Vaiśeṣikas); cakṣurtātragrāhyajātimān guṇo rūpaṁ Tarka K; (it is of six

kinds: —śukla, kṛṣṇa, pīta, rakta, harita, kapila, or of seven, if citra be

added).

(3) Any visible object or thing.

(4) A handsome form or figure, beautiful form, beauty, elegance,

grace; mānupīṣu kathaṁ vā syādasya rūpasya saṁbhavaḥ S. 1. 26; vidyā

nāma narasya rūpamadhikaṁ Bh. 2. 20; rūpaṁ jarā haṁti &c.

(5) Natural state or condition, nature, property, characteristic,

essence.

(6) Mode, manner.

(7) A sign, feature.

(8) Kind, sort, species

(9) An image, a reflected image. (10) Similitude, resemblance.

(11) Specimen, type, pattern.

(12) An inflected form, the form of a noun or a verb derived from

inflection (declension or conjugation).

(13) The number one, an arithmetical unit.

(14) An integer.

(15) A drama, play, see rūpaka.

(16) Acquiring familiarity with any book by learning it by heart or by

frequent recitation.

(17) Cattle.

(18) A sound, a word.

(19) A known quantity. (20) A beast.

(21) A verse.

(22) A name.

(23) The white colour. (rūpa is frequently used at the end of comp. in

the sense of ‘formed or composed of,’ ‘consisting of,’ ‘in the form of,’

‘namely;’ ‘having the appearance or colour of,’ taporūpaṁ dhanaṁ;

dharmarūpaḥ sakhā &c.).

— Comp.

—adhibodhaḥ the perception of form or colour of any object by the

senses.

—abhigrāhita a. caught in the act, caught red-handed.

—asraḥ Cupid.

—ājīvā a harlot, prostitute, courtezan.

—āśrayaḥ an exceedingly beautiful person.

—iṁdriyaṁ the organ which perceives form and colour, the eye.

—uccayaḥ a collection of lovely forms; S. 2. 9.

—kāraḥ, —kṛt m. a sculptor.

—grahaḥ the eye.

—jña a. perceiving forms, distinguishing visible objects.

—tattvaṁ inherent property, essence.

—dhara a. of the form of, disguised as; jugopa

gorūpadharāmivormīm R. 2. 3.

—dhārin a. 1. having a form or shape. —2. possessed of beauty,

lovely. (—m.) an actor.

—nāśanaḥ an owl.

—bhāgānubaṁdhaḥ the addition of a fraction to a unit.

—lāvaṇyaṁ exquisiteness of form, elegance.

—viparyayaḥ disfigurement, morbid change of bodily form.

—śālin a. beautiful.

—saṁpad, —saṁpattiḥ f. perfection or excellence of form, richness

of beauty, superb beauty; udapādi cāsyā rūpasaṁpadā

āvirbhūtavismayasya tasya manasi K.

वर्ण — varṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899varṇa m. (or n. g. «ardharcādi», prob. fr. 1. «vṛ»; ifc. f. «ā») a covering,

cloak, mantle

m. a cover, lid

m. outward appearance, exterior, form, figure, shape, colour &c. &c.

m. colour of the face, (esp.) good colour or complexion, lustre, beauty

&c.

m. colour, tint, dye, pigment (for painting or writing) &c.

m. colour = race, species, kind, sort, character, nature, quality,

property (applied to persons and things) &c. &c.

m. class of men, tribe, order, caste (prob. from contrast of colour

between the dark aboriginal tribes and their fair conquerors; in esp.

applied to the āryas and the Dāsas; but more properly applicable to the

four principal classes described in Manu’s code, viz. Brāhmans,

Kshatriyas, Vaiśyas, and Sūdras; the more modern word for «caste» being

jāti; cf. 210 n. 1)

m. a letter, sound, vowel, syllable, word &c.

m. a musical sound or note (also applied to the voice of animals)

m. the order or arrangement of a song or poem

m. praise, commendation, renown, glory

varṇa m. (in alg.) an unknown magnitude or quantity

varṇa m. (in arithm.) the figure, «one»

varṇa m. (accord. to some) a co-efficient

m. a kind of measure (cf. «-tāla»)

m. gold

m. a religious observance

m. one who wards off, expeller on

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

varṇa (von 1. var) UṆĀDIS. 3, 10. m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31.

am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā. 1) m. «Ueberwurf, Decke» AK. 2, 8, 2, 10.

H. 680. an. 2, 152 (wo kuthāyām st. kupyāyām zu lesen ist). MED. ṇ. 26.

HALĀY. 2, 153. = veṣa «Kleid» 5, 74; vgl. varṇaka 1). — 2) «Deckel, Lid»:

akṣivarṇacatuṣkam YĀJÑ. 3, 99. — 3) m. («Ueberzug») «das Ansehen, das

Aeussere, Farbe»; = rūpa H. an. MED. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. 3,

10. = śvetādi, śuklādi AK. 3, 4, 13, 50. H. 1392. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5,

74. VIŚVA a. a. O. kṛṣṇa, aruṇa ṚV. 1, 73, 7. naktoṣāsā

varṇamāmemyāne 96, 5. 113, 2. sūraḥ 4, 5, 13. tava spārhe varṇa ā

saṁdṛśi śriyaḥ 2, 1, 12. suścandra 34, 13. ruśant 10, 3, 3. 9, 97, 15.

gobhiṣṭe varṇamabhi vāsayāmasi 104, 4. 105, 4. 10, 124, 7. AV. 1, 22. 1.

2. 23, 2. yenedamadya rocate ko asminvarṇamābharat 11, 8, 16. bhadraṁ

varṇaṁ puṣyan so v. a. «in schönem Aussehen glänzend» VS. 4, 2. 26.

pṛśni AIT. BR. 5, 23. lohitakṛṣṇavarṇā ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 5. M. 8, 32.

megha- MBH. 3, 1831. pāṇḍu- 2106. 12721. 9, 2644. R. 1, 53, 20. 2, 63,

18. 91, 72. 4, 59, 18. prasanna- 5, 56, 4. SUŚR. 1, 30, 13. 85, 18. 313, 4.

2, 438, 15. MEGH. 47. 50. 82. -prakarṣa KUMĀRAS. 3, 28. VARĀH. BṚH.

S. 10, 21. 11, 6. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 111. BHĀG. P. 2, 7, 11. 5, 14, 7. 8, 24, 48.

fünf «Grundfarben» SUŚR. 1, 274, 16. AMṚTAN. UP. in Ind. St. 9, 37.

pañca- KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 9, 13. Schol. zu 23, 3, 6. varṇatas «der Farbe nach»

ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 8. 10. mukhavarṇasya vikriyā «Gesichtsfarbe» R. 2, 35, 34.

76, 4. 4, 3, 26. MBH. 3, 15677. Spr. 2048. das einfache varṇa dass.: —

prasāda ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2, 13. M. 8, 25. varṇaṁ pūrvocitaṁ jahat R. 2, 35,

2. 6, 6, 2. Spr. 2754. 4017. RAGH. 8, 42. varṇarūpopasaṁpanna «eine

angenehme, schöne Farbe» M. 4, 68. gandhavarṇarasānvita 5, 128.

varṇopapannā nāryaḥ «eine schöne Gesichtsfarbe» MBH. 4, 2366. neben

rāga «Farbe»: mañjiṣṭhārāgavarṇābha HARIV. 11698. «Farbe zum Malen

(Schreiben)»: yathā hi bharato varṇairvarṇayatyātmanastanum Spr. 4796.

MBH. 13, 5505. ŚĀK. 164. varṇa m. = aṅgarāga und citra H. an. m. n. =

vilepana MED. — 4) m. («Farbe» so v. a. «Sorte) Art, Geschlecht,

Gattung»; von Personen und Sachen (= bheda, m. H. an. m. n. MED. m. =

guṇa H. an. MED.): dāsa ṚV. 2, 12, 4. hatvī dasyūnprāryaṁ varṇamāvat

3, 34, 9. PAÑCAV. BR. 5, 5, 14. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 8, 25, 6. asurya AIT. BR. 6,

36. devāso manyuṁ dāsasya ścamnante na ā vakṣansuvitāya varṇam «sie

mögen unsere Art zum Heile führen» (SĀY. «Abwehrer») ṚV. 1, 104, 2.

varṇaṁ punānā yaśasaṁ suvīram 2, 3, 5. varṇaṁ pavitraṁ punatī na āgāt

PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 2. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 2, 2. acetayaddhiya imā jaritre premaṁ

varṇamatiracchukramāsām ṚV. 3, 34, 5. yasya varṇaṁ madhuścutaṁ

hariṁ hinvantyadribhiḥ «dessen süsssaftige goldene Art man mit Steinen

treibt» d. h. «bearbeitet» 9, 65, 8. asuryaṁ vā etasmādvarṇaṁ kṛtvā

paśavo vīryamapakrāmanti «asurischen Charakter annehmend» TBR. 1, 4,

7, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 10, 2. ṚV. 9, 71, 2. tveṣaṁ rūpaṁ kṛṇute varṇo asya

saḥ «das ist seine Weise» 8. mṛtyorvā eṣa varṇaḥ. yacchārdūlaḥ «eine

Form des Todes» TBR. 1, 7, 8, 1. TS. 2, 5, 1, 3. 8, 1. ubhau

varṇāvṛṣirugraḥ pupoṣa «beide Arten» (SĀY.) ṚV. 1, 179, 6. samānaṁ

varṇamabhi śumbhamānā «in derselben Weise» 92, 10. apa pāpaṁ

varṇaṁ hate «er hält übles Wesen von sich ab» TS. 2, 2, 5, 1. 4, 11, 6.

sarvānvarṇāniṣṭakānāṁ kuryāt «alle Arten» 5, 7, 8, 3. varṇānupūrvyeṇa

KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 3, 6. PAÑCAV. BR. 13, 5, 2. 14, 9, 3. sirāvarṇavibhakti

«Arten der Gefässe» SUŚR. 1, 353, 19 (so eine Berl. Hdschr., varṇana die

gedr. Ausg.). ya eko ‘varṇo bahudhā śaktiyogādvarṇānanekānnihitārtho

dadhāti «mannichfache Erscheinungsformen» ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 1. eka-

«einartig» BHĀG. P. 8, 5, 29. agni- «feuerartig» d. i. «glühend heiss» M. 11,

90. fg. vāgbhirmantravarṇābhiḥ Mantra-«artig» BHĀG. P. 5, 24, 30. — 5)

m. («Menschenart») «Kaste» AK. 2, 7, 1. 3, 4, 13, 50. H. an. MED. HALĀY.

2, 237. 5, 74. VIŚVA a. a. O. catvāro vai varṇāḥ ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 9. 6, 4,

4, 13. AIT. BR. 8, 4. NIR. 3, 8. śaudra ŚAT. BR. 6, 4, 4, 9. AIT. BR. 8, 4.

aryābhāve yaḥ kaścāryo varṇaḥ d. h. «wenn kein» Vaiśya «da ist, dann

ein» Brāhmaṇa «oder» Kshatrija LĀṬY. 4, 3, 6. 17. daivyo vai varṇo

brāhmaṇaḥ. asuryaḥ śūdraḥ TBR. 1, 2, 6, 7. M. 1, 2. 91. 107. 116. 2, 18.

137. 3, 20. 5, 57. 8, 123. fg. MBH. 13, 181. R. 1, 6, 16. 7, 15. SUŚR. 1, 7,

2. 104, 20. 122, 16. ŚĀK. 46. nṛpatayo rakṣanti varṇān VARĀH. BṚH. S.

27, 8. 33, 14. 47, 11. 52, 1. 53, 69. BHĀG. P. 1, 16, 32. 9, 14, 48. dvaijāta

M. 8, 374. varṇānāṁ brāhmaṇo guruḥ Spr. 868. -guru ist der Fürst

RĀJA-TAR. 3, 85 varṇāśramāḥ Spr. 4973. ŚĀK. 63,15. fg. Ind. St.1,20,24.

Verz. d. Oxf. H.8,a,20. fg. 10,b,22. RĀJA-TAR.6,108. LA. (III) 86,15.

P.1,1,31, Schol. varṇāśramaguru Beiw. Śiva’s ŚIV. -dharmāḥ M.2,25. Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 85,a,13. varṇānāṁ saṁkaraḥ M. 9, 67. varṇānāṁ vyabhicāraḥ

10, 24. uttama Spr. 443. avara- M. 3, 241. 9, 248. na

kaścidvarṇānāmapathamapakṛṣṭo ‘pi bhajate ŚĀK. 107. nihīna- MBH. 4,

412. hīna- Spr. 2335. nyūna- MĀRK. P. 118, 4. ete ṣaṭsadṛśānvarṇān

janayanti svayoniṣu «Zwischenkasten» M. 10, 27. pratikūlaṁ vartamānā

bāhyā bāhyatarānpunaḥ. hīnā hīnānprasūyante varṇānpañcadaśaiva tu..

31. Die vier «Kasten» mit vier «Farben» in Verbindung gebracht:

brāhmaṇānāṁ sito varṇaḥ kṣatriyāṇāṁ ca lohitaḥ. vaiśyānāṁ pītako

varṇaḥ śūdrāṇāmasitastathā.. MBH. 12, 6934. Ind. St. 10, 10. — 6) («eine

Form» oder «Figur») «Buchstab; Laut; Vocal; Silbe; Wort»; m. n. (das n.

nicht zu belegen) = akṣara AK. 3, 4, 13, 50. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 74.

VIŚVA a. a. O. tebhyastrayo varṇā ajāyantākāra ukāro makāra iti AIT. BR.

5, 32 (ein ganz spätes Stück). ŚĀÑKH. BR. 26, 5. parimitā varṇā

aparimitāṁ vāco gātamāpnuvanti ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 5, 16. LĀṬY. 7, 11, 19.

akṣaravarṇasāmānya NIR. 2, 1. -lopa ebend. tā varṇānāṁ prakṛtayo

bhavanti ṚV. PRĀT. 13, 2. eke varṇāṁ chāśvatikānna kāryān 4. 14, 29.

VS. PRĀT. 1, 34. 4, 146. AV. PRĀT. 1, 92. TS. PRĀT. 2, 10. fg. P. 1, 1, 9,

Schol. VOP. 1, 1. svaravyañjanātmakavarṇoccāraṇa Ind. St. 1, 16, 16.

BHĀG. P. 6, 16, 32. SARVADARŚANAS. 128, 22. 140, 16. fgg. -buddhi «der

mit den Lauten verbundene Begriff» 141, 21. śabdo varṇātmakaḥ

saṁskṛtabhāṣādirūpaḥ TARKAS. 19. KĀVYĀD.3,114. BHĀṢĀP. 163. Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 88,b,5. 19. parayā varṇasaṁpadā (vyājahāra) HARIV. 12178.

ṛkāra-, ṛ- ṚV. PRĀT. 6, 13. 9, 2. AV. PRĀT. 1, 37. 3, 44. fg. 4, 56. P. 6, 1,

182. 2, 90. 3, 112. ŚĀNT. 2, 8. yīvarṇayoḥ P. 7, 4, 53. ra- AK. 3, 4, 20,

135. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 89, 15. 90, 13. varṇāṣṭaka 96, 15. fünfundsechzig

Laute VS. PRĀT. 8, 30. dreiundsechzig HARIV. 16161. ŚIKṢĀ in Ind. St. 4,

348. vierundsechzig ebend. -devatāḥ VS. PRĀT. 8, 47. dīrghavarṇānta M.

2, 33. saṁdhyakṣarāṇi saṁspṛṣṭavarṇānyekavarṇavadvṛttiḥ AV. PRĀT. 1,

40. varṇānāmekaprāṇayogaḥ saṁhitā «Silbe» VS. PRĀT. 1, 158. dīrgha

ŚRUT. 15. hrasva 19. varṇāpadavākyaviviktatā H. 71. AK. 1, 1, 5, 20. Ind.

St. 8, 390, N. dhvanirvarṇāḥ padaṁ vākyam Verz. d. Oxf. H. 208,a, No.

489. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 308. fg. 335.

avyaktavarṇaramaṇīyavacaḥpravṛtti (tanaya) «unverständliche Worte»

Spr. 3726. VIKR. 78, 10. alikhadvarṇānkhaṅkhasyāṁśukapallave. vadhyo

‘pi na hato yattvaṁ smartavyaṁ tattavetyasau.. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 522. fg. 6,

30. «ein musikalischer Ton»: śaravarṇāṁ dhanurvīṇāṁ śatrumadhye

pravādaya «lass die Laute ‘Bogen,’ auf der die» (schwirrenden) «Pfeile die

Töne darstellen, erschallen» MBH. 4, 1164. varṇāḥ (rāgāḥ ed. Bomb.)

ṣaḍviṁśatiḥ PAÑCAT. V. 44. neben svara von «Thierlauten»:

pūrṇavarṇasvarāśceme pravadanti mṛgadvijāḥ R. 5, 73, 52.

pūrṇavalgusvarāśca ed. Bomb. 6, 4, 47. — 7) m. «Leib, Preis»; = stuti AK.

3, 4, 13, 50. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 5, 74. VIŚVA a. a. O. Lot. de la b. l. 314.

paravarṇagrahaṇeṣu Spr. 5210. = gītakrama H. an. HALĀY. upāttavarṇe

(= prārabdhagītakrame sati MALLIN.) carite pinākinaḥ KUMĀRAS. 5, 56.

— 8) m. «Ruhm» H. an. MED. HALĀY. VIŚVA a. a. O.

svabhujavikramalabdha- MṚCCH. 67, 17. prajārañjanalabdha- RAGH. 6,

21. hierher wohl auch -haraṇa RĀJA-TAR. 5, 80. — 9) «eine unbekannte

Grösse» COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 431. Alg. 324. — 10) «die Ziffer Eins» Ind.

St. 8, 456. — 11) m. = vrata H. an. HALĀY. — 12) m. = śobhā HALĀY. —

13) m. = svarṇa «Gold» H. an. — 14) m. = tālaviśeṣa «ein best. Tact» H.

an. — 15) n. «Saffran» H. 644. H. an. HALĀY. 2, 388. — 16) f. ā «Cajanus

indicus Spreng.» H. 1175. — Vgl. avarṇa (als adj. in ŚVETĀŚV. UP. «keine

Erscheinungsform habend»), agni-, apa-, amīta-, utpalavarṇā, ekavarṇa,

kulavarṇā, jyeṣṭhavarṇa, tri-, durvarṇa, dvi-, dhūmra-, dhṛṣadvarṇa,

pañca-, pāvaka-, priyavarṇī, bahuvarṇa, madhu-, mantra- (genauer «der

Wortlaut eines Spruches» oder «Liedes»; vgl. noch ŚAṁK. zu AIT. UP. S.

184. zu BṚH. ĀR. UP. S. 132. 146), yathārha-, rakta-, labdha-, vi-, sa-,

sama-, spṛhayadvarṇa, hiraṇya-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

varṇa Caste. The four castes of Brāhmaṇa, Kṣatriya, Vaiśya and Śūdra

and the eleven castes produced by the intermingling of these four castes,

only these are taken into account when we speak of Varṇa. To

understand about the four castes of Brāhmaṇa, Kṣatriya, Vaiśya and

Śūdra, see under Cāturvarṇya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

varṇa varṇa, i. e. vṛ + na,

I. m.

1. Colour, Hit. iii. d. 33.

2. Staining the body with coloured unguents.

3. Coloured cloth thrown over the back of an elephant.

4. Gold.

5. Beauty.

6. Theatrical dress or embellishment.

7. Quality, property.

8. Fame.

9. Praise.

10. A musical mode, Pañc. v. d. 44.

11. The arrangement of a poem.

12. A caste, Man. 1, 91; Hit. pr. 46, M.M. (hīna-, adj. One of a low

caste); caste and colour at once, Rājat. 5, 377; class, tribe, kind.

13. Religious observance.

II. m. and n.

1. Perfume for the person.

2. Form, figure.

3. Sort, kind.

4. A letter of the alphabet, Bhāṣāp. 163; Vikr. 78, 10.

5. A syllable, Śrut. 19.

6. The purity of gold, as ascertained by its streak on the touch-stone.

III. n. Saffron.

— Comp. a-, m. reproach, blame, Ragh. 14, 38. agni-,

I. adj. 1. fire-coloured, Rām. 3, 58, 35. 2. boiling hot, Man. 11, 91.

II. m. a proper name, Hariv. 828. eka-, adj. 1. onecoloured, plain, MBh.

13, 3781. 2. identical, Bhāg. P. 8, 5, 29. 3. consisting in one caste only,

MBh. 3, 13051. jyeṣṭha-, m. a Brāhmaṇa, MBh. 13, 6571. durvarṇa, i. e.

dus-,

I. adj. of a bad colour, Bhāg. P. 3, 14, 45.

II. n. silver. dhūmra-,

I. adj. grey-coloured, Rām. 4, 39, 28.

II. m. 1. the name of a mountain, Hariv. 12856. 2. a proper name, ib.

1799. bhinna-, adj. discoloured, pale, Megh. 82; cf. Pañc. i. d. 212

(bhinna-svara-mukha-varṇa, speechless and pale, or, ‘with altered

accents and complexion’). madhu-, adj. sweet, like honey, Chr. 293, 2 =

Rigv. i. 87, 2. megha-, adj. cloud-coloured, Indr. 5, 15. yathārha-, i. e.

yathā-arha-, m. a spy. labdha-, adj. learned, Ragh. 11, 2. vi-,

I. adj. 1. wanting colour, pale, Nal. 2, 2. 2. bad-coloured. 3. changing

colour. 4. low.

II. m. a man of a low caste. sa-,

I. adj. 1. like, resembling, Megh. 18. 2. of the same caste, kind, MBh. 2,

865.

II. f. ṇā, Chāyā, the wife of the sun. sama-,

I. adj. of the same colour, caste, etc.

II. m. community of caste. su-,

I. adj. 1. of a good colour. 2. brilliant. 3. of a good tribe.

II. n. 1. gold, Pañc. 191, 25. 2. wealth.

III. m. and n. a weight of gold equal to sixteen Māṣas, i. e. about

seventy-five grains Troy, Man. 8, 134; a sort of coin, Pañc. 134, 3.

IV. m. 1. a sort of sacrifice. 2. a tree, Cassia fistula.

V. f. ṇā, the name of several plants. hiraṇya-, f. ṇā, a river.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

varṇa m. cover, lid; outside, external appearance, colour, dye, paint,

complexion; sort, kind, character, sort of men i.e. caste; letter, sound,

vowel, syllable, word; praise, glory.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

varṇa var-ṇa, m. [covering, coating: 1. vṛ] cover, lid (C., rare); exterior,

appearance, colour (very common); (good) complexion (C.); pigment (for

writing or painting; C.); (colour =) race, species, kind; character, nature,

form; caste (prob. from contrast of colour between aboriginal slaves and

their fair conquerors); (coloured mark), letter; sound; vowel; syllable;

word; musical note (rare); praise (rare); fame, renown (rare).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

varṇa ka varṇe . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (curā°para°-saka°-seṭ .) ka,

varṇayati . ayaṁ kaścinna manyate . varṇaḥ śuklādikriyā . iti durgādāsaḥ

..

varṇa t ka stutivistāraśuklādyudyuktidīpane . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ ..

(adanta curā°-para°-saka°dīpane aka°-seṭ .) varṇayati varṇāpayati kaviḥ

stautītyarthaḥ . varṇayati tantuṁ vistārayatītyarthaḥ . varṇayati pratimāṁ

śuklādivarṇāṁ karotītyarthaḥ . varṇayati udyuṅkte dīpyate vetyarthaḥ .

śuklādyatyuktidīpane ityapi pāṭhaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

varṇa stutau vistāre śuklādivarṇakaraṇe udyoge dīpane ca adu° cu° ubha°

saka° seṭa . varṇayati te avavarṇat ta .

varṇa varṇane cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . varṇayati te avavarṇat ta .

varṇa na° varṇa—ac . 1 kuṅkuma na° 2 svarṇe 3 vrate 4 śuklādirūpe 5

akārādyakṣare 6 bhede 7 gītakrame 8 citre 9 tālabhede 10 aṅgarāge pu°

hemaca° . 11 gajacitrakambale pu° amaraḥ 12 yaśasi 13 guṇe 14 stutau

pu° medi° . bheda rūpe akṣare pu° na° medi° . 15 brāhmaṇādijātau pu°

amaraḥ . cāturvarṇyaṁ mayā sṛṣṭam gītā . tatra viprādivarṇānāṁ sṛṣṭiḥ

taddharmāśca manunā uktā yathā lokānāntu vivṛddhyarthaṁ

sukhabāhūrūpādataḥ . brāhmaṇaṁ kṣattriyaṁ vaiśyaṁ śūdrañca

niravartayat . musvavāhūrūpajjānāṁ pṛthak karmāṇyakalpayat .

adhyāpanamadhyayanaṁ yajanaṁ yājanastathā brāhmaṇo’mā

mukhamāsīdbāhūrājanyaḥ kṛtaḥ . ūrū tadasya yadvaiśyaḥ padbhyāṁ

śūdro ajāyata yaju° 31 11 teṣāṁ brāhmaṇasya śraiṣṭhye kāraṇaṁ

manunoktaṁ yathā ūrdhyanābhermedhyataraḥ puruṣaḥ parikīrtitaḥ .

tasmānmedhyatamaṁ tvasya mukhamuktaṁ svayambhuvā .

uttamāṅgodbhavāt jyaiṣṭyād brahmaṇaścaiva dhāraṇāt . sarvasyaivāsya

sargasya dharmato brāhmaṇaḥ prabhuḥ varṇadharmāśca

jātidharmaśabde 3105 pṛ° dṛśyāḥ . tatra akṣararūpavarṇotpattikramaḥ

tatbhedāśca śabdārtharatne’smābhiruktā yathā atha

varṇotpattiprakārastāvadabhidhīyate . cetanena jñātārthavivakṣayā

tadbodhakaśabdaniṣpādanāya preritamantaḥkaraṇaṁ

mūlādhārasthitamanalaṁ cālayati taccālitaścānalaḥ

tatsthalasthānilacālanāya prabhavati taccālitena cānilena tatraiva

sūkṣmarūpeṇotpāditaḥ śabdaḥ parā vāgityabhicīyate .

tatonābhideśaparyantaṁ calitena tena taddeśa saṁyogādutpāditaḥ

śabdaḥ paśyantīti vyavahriyate etadvayasya sṛkṣmasūkṣmataratayā

īśvarayogimātragamyatā nāsmadoyaśrutigīcaratā . tatastenaiva

hṛdayadeśaṁ parisaratā hṛdayasaṁyogena niṣpāditaḥ śabdo

madhyetyucyate sā ca svakarṇapidhānena dhvanyātmakatayā

sūkṣmarūpeṇa kadācidasyākabhavi samadhigamyā . tatī

mukhaparyantamāgacchatā tena kaṇṭhadeśaṁ prāpya āhatya

mūrdhānaṁ tatpratighātena parāvṛtya ca mukhavivare kaṇṭhādiṣu

tattadaṣṭasthāneṣu svābhighātenotpāditaḥ śabdo vaisvarītyucyate .

taduktaṁ śikṣāyām ātmā buddhyā sametyārthān mano yuṅkte vivakṣayā .

manaḥ kāyāgnimāhanti sa prerayati mārutam . sodīrṇo mūrghnyamihato

vaktramāpadya mārutaḥ . varṇān janayate teṣāṁ vibhāgaḥ pañcadhā

mataḥ . svarataḥ kālataḥ sthānāt prayatnānupradānataḥ iti .

saṁskārarūpeṇa svagatānarthān buddhyā buddhivṛttyā sametya

vivayīkṛtyerthaḥ . tathā . prāṇāpānāntare devī vāgvai nityaṁ hi tiṣṭhati .

sthāneṣu vikṛte vāyau kṛtavarṇaparigrahā . vaikharī vāk prayoktṝṇāṁ

prāṇavṛttinivandhinī . kevalaṁ buddhuvrapādānā kramarūpānupātinī .

prāṇavṛttimanukramya madhyamā vāk pravartate . avibhāgā tu paśyantī

sarvataḥ saṁhṛtakramā . svarūpajyotirevātaḥ parā vāganapāyinīti

bhārate’pyuktam . atra prāṇāpānāntare

ityadhikaraṇanideśādākāśasthāyitā nityamityabhidhānāt

yāvatpralayaparyantasthāyitā prāṇāpānāderapi tathaiva

nityatvābhyupagamāt . na tu kṣaṇikatā madhye utpattivināśakalpane

goravāt śabdārthayornityasambandhasvīkārādanityena śabdena

nityārthamambandhasvīkāre’yuktatvāpatteśca . nityatve’pi teṣāṁ

vyañjakasadbhāvābhāvābhyāṁ pratyayāpatyayāvityanyatra vistaraḥ .

sthāneṣu kaṇṭhatālvādyaṣṭasthāneṣu vāyau mūlādhārasthe vikṛte

vivakṣāpreritamanoniyuktāmbisaṁkṣobhāccalite ityarthaḥ .

kṛtavarṇaparigrahā varṇabhāvāpannā, tacca sthāneṣviti

vyavahitenānvitam . prāṇavṛttinibandhinītyanena

vrāṇavṛttervāyostattaddeśaparyantagamanamabhihitaṁ,

kebalamityanena kaṇṭhatālvādisthānānapekṣābhihitā .

buddhyupādānetyanena hṛdayasthānagamanamuktaṁ

buddherhṛdayasthatvāt . sarvataḥ sahṛtakrametyanena

hṛdayasthānagamanānapekṣābhihitā . avibhāgetyanena madhyamāyā

vibhāgarūpaviśeṣasya karṇapidhānenāpyavagamāt paśyantyāstu

tadvyudāsaḥ . anapāyinī svasthānādacalitā prāṇāpānāntare

mūlādhārasthiteti yāvat . ato yathāpradarśitaṁ parādīnāṁ vibhāgaṁ

pratipādayatīdaṁ mahābhāratīyamalaṁ vistareṇa .

abhighātasthānāni cāṣṭavidhāni sāmānyato veditavyāni aṣṭau sthānāni

varṇānāmuraḥ kaṇṭhaḥ śirastathā . jihvāmūlañca dantāśca nāsikoṣṭhau ca

tālu ceti śikṣā kṛdukteḥ . varṇāśca matabhedena triṣaṣṭiścatuḥṣaṣṭirvā

śikṣāyāmabhihitā veditavyāḥ . yathā catuḥṣaṣṭistriṣaṣṭivā varṇāḥ

sambhavato matāḥ . svarā viṁśatirekaśca sparśānāṁ pañcaviṁśatiḥ .

yādayaśca smṛtā hyaṣṭau catvā raśca yamāḥ smṛtāḥ . anusvāro

visargaśca + kaṁopau cāpi parāśritau . duḥspṛṣṭaśceti vijñeyo ḷkāraḥ

pluta eva veti . asyārthaḥ a i u ṛ ityeṣāṁ hrasvadīrghaplutāḥ kālakṛtā

dvādaśa bhedāḥ ḷkārasyaikau bhedo’sya dīrghābhāvāt plutastūttaraṁ

pratipāditaḥ . evāṁ caturṇāṁ hrasvābhāvāt dīghaplutabhedenāṣṭau

bhedāḥ ityekaviṁśatiḥ svarāḥ . sparśāḥ kādayo māvasānāḥ

pañcaviṁśatiḥ . yādayo hāntā aṣṭau . yamāḥ vargeṣvādyānāṁ caturṇāṁ

pañcame pare madhye pūrbasadṛśāḥ prātiśākhye prasiddhāścatvāro

varṇāḥ . yathā palikṁkrī cakhṁgnatuḥ . agṁgniḥ . patighṁdhnītyādau .

anusvārādayaścatvāraḥ spaṣṭāḥ . + kaṁpau cāpi parāmitāvityuktistu

phakhayoḥ paravorekavidhaḥ paphayo parayoranyavidhaḥ

kaṇṭhyoṣṭhyatvabhedāditi jñāpanāya . duḥspṛṣṭaḥ īṣatspṛṣṭaḥ ḷkāraḥ .

aco’spṛṣṭā ṣaṇastvīṣannemaspṛṣṭāḥ śalastathā ityanena pratipāditasya

yaṇpadābhidheyayavaralo dharmasya īṣatspṛṣṭatvasya ḷkāre kathanāt

ḷkārasya svaratvayaṇtvobhayadharmasamāveśāt dvividhatā iti

triṣaṣṭirbhedāḥ . ḷkārasya plutatve catuḥṣaṣṭirbhedāḥ . evaṁ varṇānāṁ

sāmānyato bhede voghite eteṣāmutpattisthānāni

bāhyābhyantaraprayatnamedāna pradarśyante . tatra sthānāni hakāraṁ

pañcamairyuktamantasthābhiśca saṁyutam . aurasyantaṁ vijānīyāt

kaṇṭhyamāhurasaṁyutam . kaṇṭhyāvahāvicuyaśāstālavyā oṣṭhajāvupū .

syurmūrdhanthā ṛṭuraṣā dantyā ḷtulasāḥ smṛtāḥ . jihvāmūle tu kuḥ

proktaḥ dantyauṣṭyo vaḥ smṛto budhaiḥ . e ai tu kaṇṭhyatālavyāvoau

kaṇṭhyoṣṭhajau smṛtau . ardhamātrā tu kaṇṭhyā syādekāraikārayorbhavet

. okāraukārayostadvaditi . anusvārayamānāñca nāsikā sthānamucyate .

ayogavāhā vijñeyā āśrayasthāna° bhāgina iti śikṣākṛduktāni beditavyāni .

yadyapi sarveṣāṁ varṇānāmuccāraṇe kaṇṭhavyāpāra āvaśyakastathāpi

cakārādyuccāraṇe tālvādivyāpāro’pyapekṣita iti tanmātrāmātrakṛtatvena

varṇānāṁ vailakṣaṇyam . jihvamūle tu kuḥ proktaḥ iti

pāṇiniśikṣābhidhānāt kavargasya kaṇṭhyatvavyavahārastu kaṇṭaśabdasya

kaṇṭamūlaparatayā bhākta eva tavargasya dattamūlīyatvena dantyatvavat

anyathā bhagnadantasya tadanuccārāpatteḥ . jihvāmūlīyasya

āśrayasthānabhāgitvena tadāśrayasya korapi jihvāmūlasthānatvaucityāt .

dantyoṣṭhyova ityādāvubhayoreva pratyeka vakārasthānatvaṁ naṁ tu

samuditayoḥ tathā sati dantoṣṭhya ityeva pariśikṣyeta . atastasya

dantvauṣṭhyomayakāryanimittatā evamagrepi draṣṭavyam . yamānāṁ

prātiśākhyaprasiddhānāṁ kāṁdicatuṣṭayānāṁ pūrvoditānāṁ

yamsaṁjñānodhitānāñca nāsikāpi sthānamadhikamupadiśyate . tatrā ca

yametyupalakṣaṇam . amo’nunāsikā nahrau ityuktya .

hakārarakārabhinnānāmamānāṁ nāsikā sthānatvābhidhānāt

nāsāmanugataḥ sthānatvenetyanunāsikaśabdavyutpattyā

nāsikāsthānatvaprāpteśca . tatra nahrāviti punaḥ hakārarakārayoḥ

paryudāsaḥ . mukhanāsikāvacano’nunāsikāḥ iti pā° sūtre mukhapadasya

kaṇṭhāditattatsthānaparatayā yamānāmubhayasthānatvam . ayogavāhā

visargā jihvāmūlīyopādhmānīyayorapi

visargaviśeṣarūpatvenāśrayasthānabhāgitvama .

āśrayasthānabhāgitvañca yamāśrityaite uccāryante

tatsyānabhāgitvamataḥ visargasya kakhayoḥ

parayorjihvāmūloccāryamāṇayorāśrayatvena tatsthānabhāgitvāt

jihvāmūlīyarūpānvitanāmatā samunneyā . paphayoḥ

parayoroṣṭhoccāryamāṇayorāśrayatvenopa dhmānīyatā . uśca paśca

ādhmāyete anena sthānaneti vyutpatteḥ upādhmāna śabda oṣavacanaḥ .

tatsthānayogyatvādanvitanāmatā cāvadheyā . ataeva kaumudyāṁ

jihvāmūlīyasya jihvāmūlamupādhmānīyasyoṣṭhāvityuktam . yadyapi

sarveṣāṁ varṇānāmākāśasthānatvaṁ karaṇatvañca kaṇṭhādīnāṁ

tadutpattau yuktaṁ tathāpi teṣāṁ sthānatvavyavahāro

varṇābhivyañjakatālvādau varṇajanakavāyusaṁyogādhāre

varṇādhāratvāropeṇa bhākta eva . tattatsthāneṣu jihvāgrādisambandhena

varṇotpattyā jihvāgrādisthite tatsambandhajanakaprayatnaviśeṣe

ābhyantaraprayatnavācye spṛṣṭatādāveva karaṇatvavyavahāraḥ samucita

. varṇābhivyaktyanantarabhāvinasta āntaratamyaparīkṣopayuktāḥ

kaṇṭhavivaravikāśāderāsyavahirdeśāvacchinnakāryasya janakā bāhyā

yatnā guṇaśabdenocyante ityādikaṁ śekharādau spaṣṭam .

ābhyantaraprayatnāstu varṇotpatteḥ prāgbhāvino vāhyāstu tadutpatteḥ

paścādbhāvina iti vivekaḥ . tathāhi nābhideśāt ptayatnapreritaḥ

prāṇavāyurūrdhvamāgacchannuraḥpramṛtīni sthānānyāhanti utpādayati ca

tato varṇān tadabhivyañjakadhvanīṁśca tatra varṇotpatteḥ prāk

jihvāgropāgramadhyamūlāni tattadvarṇo tpattisthānaṁ tālvādikaṁ yadā

samyak spṛśanti tadā spṛṣṭatā prayatno yadā īṣat spṛśanti tathā

īṣatspṛṣṭatā samīpāvasthāne saṁvṛtatā dūrāvasthāne vivṛtatā

ityevamābhyantaraprayatnabhedāt varṇānāṁ bhedāḥ . ataeva

icavargayaśānāṁ tālavyatvāviśeṣe’pi cavargoccāraṇe kartavye

tālusthānena saha jihvāgrādīnāṁ samyak sparśaḥ, yakāroccāraṇe tu īṣat

sparśaḥ śakārekāroccāraṇe dūramanopāvasthānamiti . eteṣāṁ

cābhyantaratvaṁ

oṣṭhaprabhṛtikākalījanakakākalasthānaparyantarūpāsyāntargatatattatsthā

neṣu jihvāgrādīnāṁ sparśādicatuṣṭayarūpābhyantarakāryakāritvāt

varṇotpattyavyavahitaprāgbhāvitvācca bodhyam . vivārasaṁvārau tu

galatilasya vikāśāvikāśātmakau bāhyau prayatnau vivṛtasaṁvṛtābhyāṁ

bhinnāveva tayoḥ samīpadūrāvasthānātmakatvāditi vivektavyam . te ca

ābhyantarāḥ prayatnāḥ keṣāṁ varṇānāṅke ityetattāvadadhīyate .

kādimāvasānānāṁ spṛṣṭatā ataeva teṣāṁ sakyaksparśavattvena

sparśapadavācyatā . yaṇaḥ īṣat spṛṣṭatā . teṣāñca

spṛṣṭavivṛtayormadhyasthitatvena laukikavyavahāreṣvapi śasādīnāṁ

vargyāṇāñca madhyasthitatvena cāntaḥsthavarṇatvam antaḥsthābhiśca

saṁyutamityukterantaḥsthāśabdaḥ ādantaḥ . śaṣasahānāṁ acāñca

vivṛtatā . śasahānāñca uṣmaśabdābhidheyavāyupradhānatvāt

ūṣmaśabdavācyatā . acāñca svayaṁ rājamānatvāt

udāttādisvaravattvācca svarābhidheyatā . acaḥ svayaṁ virājante ityukteḥ

udāttaścānudāttaśca svaritaśca svarāstrayaḥ . hrasvo dīrghaḥ plutaśceti

kālato niyamā acityukteśca . tatra hrasvasya saṁvṛtatā . saṁvṛtaṁ

tvekamātraṁ syāt vivṛtantu dvimātrakam ityukteḥ hrasvasyaikamātratayā

prayoge saṁvṛtatā prakriyāyāntu vivṛtataiva . tatra mūlaṁ acospṛṣṭā

yaṇastvoṣan nemaspṛṣṭāḥ śalastathā . śeṣāḥ spṛṣṭā halaḥ proktā iti

śikṣāvākyameva bodhyam . atrācaḥ sparśābhāvarūpavivṛtatvavantaḥ

yaṇaḥ yavaraṇastvīṣat spṛṣṭā ityarthaḥ nemaityardhavācī . śalaḥ

śaṣasahā nemaspṛṣṭā ardhaspṛṣṭā arthādardhavivṛtāḥ .

svarāṇāmuśaṇāñcaiva vivṛtaṁ karaṇaṁ smṛtam ityekavākyatvāt . ete ca

sthānaprayatnāḥ savarṇasaṁjñāyāmupayuktāḥ bāhyaprayatnāstu

āntaratamyaparīkṣāyāsevopayogina iti tulyāsyaprayatnaṁ savaṇamiti pā°

sūtrabhāṣyādau spaṣṭam . tena takārasthāne

vivāraśvāsaghoṣālpaprāṇarūpabāhyaprayatnasāmyena cakāraṭakārādeśaḥ

sthāne’ntaratamaḥ iti pā° sūtrabhāṣyayoḥ spaṣṭam .

bahusamānagharmatvamevāntaratamye heturiti bodhyam .

bāhyāḥprayatnāścāṣṭavidhāḥ

kākalakādhaḥsthalagalabilasaṅkocavikāśaśvāsotpattidhvaniviśeṣaghoṣālp

aghoṣaprāṇālpatvamahattva rūpakāryakarā yathākramaṁ

vivārasavāraśvāsanādaghoṣālpaghoṣālpaprāṇamahāprāṇanāmāno

mantavyāḥ . prayatnaprerito vāyurvarṇānabhivyañjya yatnaviśeṣeṇa

galavilavikāśādīnapi sampādayati ato

galabilavikāśādikaratvādāsyavahirdeśakāryakaratvāt caite bāhyā iti . te ca

svayāṁ yamāḥ khayaḥ + kaṁpau visargaḥ śara eva ca . ete

śvāsānupradānā aghoṣāśca vivṛṇvate . kaṇṭhamanye tu ghoṣāḥ syuḥ

saṁvārā nādabhāginaḥ . ayugmā vargayamagāyaṇaścālpāsavaḥ smṛtāḥ

iti siddhāntakaumudyuktadiśāvaseyāḥ . khayāṁ sthāne jātā ye yamāḥ

pūrvoktāḥ prātiśākhye prasiddhāḥ . khayaḥ, śaraḥ śaṣasahāḥ . ete

śvāsānupradānā aghoṣāḥ kaṇṭhaṁ vivṛṇvate ca . anye etadbhiñcāḥ sarve

varṇā ghoṣasaṁvāranādabāhyaprayatnavantaḥ .

vargīyaprathamatṛtīyapañcamavarṇāḥ prathamatṛtīyavargajātayamāśca

pūrvoktāḥ yaṇaśca ete alpapāṇāstadbhinnāḥ sarve mahāprāṇā iti vivekaḥ

. tathā udāttānudāttasvaritarūpāstrividhāḥ svarā

hrasvadīrghaplutakālabhedāśca svarāṇāṁ viśeṣādhāne hetavo veditavyāḥ

. tathā hi vibhāgaḥ pañcadhā mataḥ ityupakramya svarataḥ kālataḥ

sthānāt prayatnānupradānataḥ iti

svarakālasthānaprayatnānupradānābhidheyabāhyaprayatnān

varṇavimājakān pañca sāmānyato nirdiśya śikṣākṛtā

udāttaścānudāttaścetyādinā acyeva svarakālayorvibhājakatā’bhihitā .

tatra tālvādiṣu sthāneṣūrdhabhāge niṣpannojudāttaḥ

nīcairuccāryamāṇo’nudāttaḥ prathamamardhamudāttatayoccārya

uttarārdhamanudāttatayocāryamāṇaḥ svaritaḥ iti uccairudāttaḥ

nīcairanudāttaḥ samāhāraḥ svaritaḥ tasya ādita udāttamardhahrasvamiti

pāṇinisūtrajātebhyaḥ . tadevaṁ

parasparavibhājakasthānabāhyābhyantaraprayatnasvarakālakṛtaviśeṣāt

varṇānāṁ parasparaviśeṣarūpatā . sarve hi varṇāḥ puraskṛtyaiva

kiñcidviśeṣaṁ viśeṣatābhājo bhavantīti . vivāhopayogini

nakṣatraviśeṣakṛte 16 varṇakūṭe upayama śabde varṇakūṭoktau 1249 pṛ°

dṛśyam .

शशिन् — śaśin Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śaśin m. «containing a hare», the moon &c.

m. N. of the number one

m. camphor

m. a kind of metre

m. N. of a man

m. the emblem of a partic. Arhat or Jina

śaśin m. («inī») f. N. of the 8th Kalā of the moon

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śaśin m. [śaśo’styasya ini]

(1) The moon; śaśinaṁ punareti śarvarī R. 8. 56, 6. 85; Me. 41.

(2) Camphor,

— Comp.

—īśaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—kalā a digit of the moon; Mu. 1. 1.

—kāṁtaḥ the moon-gem. (

—taṁ) a lotus.

—koṭiḥ a horn of the moon.

—grahaḥ an eclipse of the moon.

—jaḥ an epithet of Budha or Mercury (son of the moon).

—prabha a. having the lustre of the moon, as bright and white as

the moon; R. 3. 16.

—bhaṁ 1. a water-lily. —2. a pearl.

—prabhā moonlight.

—bhūṣaṇaḥ, —bhṛt m.,

—mauliḥ, —śekharaḥ epithets of Śiva.

—lekhā a digit of the moon.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śaśin (von śaśa) 1) m. a) «der Mond (das Bild eines Hasen habend») AK.

1, 1, 2, 16. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 2, 11. prabhā śaśinaḥ MBH. 3, 2147. 2676. R. 1,

1, 27. 4, 54, 3. ṚT. 1, 12. MEGH. 45. 102. RAGH. 1, 83. VIKR. 8. Spr. (II)

347. 2060. 3149. (I) 2817. 2970. fgg. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 30. 4, 2. fgg. 5,

82. 11, 14. 18, 8. 81, 23. 98, 4. LAGHUJ. 2, 5. KATHĀS. 62, 39. RĀJA-

TAR. 3, 284. H. 47. HALĀY. 1, 112. BHĀG. P. 3, 15, 38. 4, 7, 21. HIT. Pr.

1. — b) Bez. «der Zahl Eins» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 98, 1. GAṆIT. MADHJAM. 3.

— c) «ein best. Metrum: metrical sequence»COLEBR. Misc. Ess. 2, 158. —

d) N. pr. eines Mannes KATHĀS. 64, 128. fgg. 89, 23. 124, 132. fgg. — 2)

f. śaśinī N. «der 8ten» Kalā «des Mondes» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 18, «b», 25. —

Vgl. prati-, śaracchaśin und śaratparva- unter śaratparvan.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śaśin m. the moon (hare-marked).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śaśin śaś-in, m. (containing a hare), moon; N..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śaśin pu° śaśo’styasya ini . 1 candre 2 karpūre ca śabdamā° .

  • Rating:
  • Views:65 views
  • Tags: -
  • Categories: Sanskrit

Comments

Write a comment

*